TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FOR
CITY OF MIAMI
WEST END PARK COMMUNITY CENTER
MARCH 2014
Number
Title
Pages
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000
SUMMARY .............................................................................................................................. 2
012000
PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES .............................................................................. 3
012500
SUBSTITUTIONS .................................................................................................................... 1
012600
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES .................................................................... 1
013000
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................. 5
014000
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................. 3
014200
REFERENCES ......................................................................................................................... 9
015000
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS .................................................................... 3
015639
TREE PROTECTION ............................................................................................................... 2
016000
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................ 3
017000
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS............................................................. 7
017419
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT & DISPOSAL ............................................... 4
018113
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................ 3
DIVISION 2 – EXISTING CONDITIONS
023000
EARTHWORK FOR BUILDINGS .......................................................................................... 2
024113
SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION .......................................................................................... 2
024116
STRUCTURE DEMOLITION ................................................................................................. 5
DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE
033000
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE ................................................................................................ 21
DIVISION 4 – MASONRY
042200
UNIT MASONRY .................................................................................................................... 11
044303
MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER ................................................................................... 5
DIVISION 5 – METALS
051200
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING ........................................................................................ 8
052100
STEEL JOIST FRAMING ........................................................................................................ 5
053100
STEEL DECKING .................................................................................................................... 5
054010
COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING .................................................................................... 7
055000
METAL FABRICATIONS ....................................................................................................... 6
DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES
061000
ROUGH CARPENTRY ............................................................................................................ 4
064100
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK................................ ............................................ 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC-1
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
071620
CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING .................................................................................... 4
072100
THERMAL INSULATION ...................................................................................................... 2
074100
SHEET METAL ROOFING ..................................................................................................... 4
078400
FIRESTOPPING ....................................................................................................................... 4
079200
JOINT SEALANTS .................................................................................................................. 7
DIVISION 8 - OPENINGS
081113
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES ......................................................................... 7
081416
FLUSH WOOD DOORS .......................................................................................................... 4
083100
ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS ........................................................................................... 3
084113
ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS............................................ 9
087100
DOOR HARDWARE ............................................................................................................... 8
088000
GLAZING ................................................................................................................................. 7
089100
LOUVERS AND VENTS ......................................................................................................... 3
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
092116
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES.......................................................................................... 4
092200
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING ............................................................................ 5
092400
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING................................................................................... 2
093000
TILING ..................................................................................................................................... 3
095123
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING .......................................................................................... 4
096500
RESILIENT FLOORING ......................................................................................................... 3
096727
EPOXY FLAKE CHIP SYSTEM............................................................................................. 3
099000
PAINTING AND COATINGS ................................................................................................. 5
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
101400
SIGNAGE ................................................................................................................................. 2
101426
EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL INLAID SIGNS ................................................................. 3
101453
TRAFFIC SIGNAGE ................................................................................................................ .2
102113
TOILET COMPARTMENTS ................................................................................................... .2
102226
OPERABLE PARTITIONS ...................................................................................................... .2
102800
TOILET BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES ............................................................... .2
107113.23 OVERHEAD COILING EXTERIOR SHUTTERS ................................................................. 4
104400
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES ...................................................................................... .1
DIVISION 21 – FIRE PROTECTION
Specification Information on Drawings
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING
Specification Information on Drawings
DIVISION 23 – HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
Specification Information on Drawings
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
Specification Information on Drawings
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS
Specification Information on Drawings
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC-2
DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
Specification Information on Drawings
DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK
310500
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR EARTHWORK ............................................................. 1
311000
SITE CLEARING ..................................................................................................................... 2
312000
EARTH MOVING .................................................................................................................... 7
312010
EARTHWORK FOR BUILDINGS .......................................................................................... 8
313116
TERMITE CONTROL ............................................................................................................. 2
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
321216
ASPHALT PAVING................................................................................................................. 3
321313
CONCRETE PAVING ............................................................................................................. 6
321613
CONCRETE SIDEWALK, CURB AND CURB & GUTTER................................................. 2
321723
PAVEMENT MARKINGS....................................................................................................... 3
328400
IRRIGATION ........................................................................................................................... 7
329000
TREES, PALMS, SHRUBS AND GROUNDCOVERS .......................................................... 6
329223
SODDING................................................................................................................................. 8
329643
TREE TRANSPLANT .............................................................................................................. 7
DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES
331000
WATER UTILITIES................................................................................................................. 5
333000
SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES .................................................................................... 3
334000
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES ........................................................................................... 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC-3
SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
PROJECT INFORMATION
A.
Project Identification: West End Park New Community Building, Project No. B-30690
1.
Project Location: 6030 SW 2nd Street, Miami, FL
B.
Owner: The City of Miami.
C.
Architect: Ferguson Glasgow Schuster Soto, Inc., 901 Ponce de Leon Blvd., Suite 304, Coral
Gables, FL 33134; fgss@fgss.net
D.
Architect's Consultants: Architect has retained the following design professionals who have
prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents:
1.
Structural Engineering: Douglas Wood Associates, Inc.
2.
MEP Engineering: Gartek Engineering Corporation
3.
Civil Engineering: Consulting Engineering & Science, Inc.
4.
Landscape Architecture: Curtis + Rogers Design Studio, Inc.
E.
The Work consists of construction of a new community center building, associated utilities and
sitework, and demolition of existing community center building and associated utilities.
F.
Work by Owner: Installation of Breakroom appliances, Audio visual equipment, CCTV
equipment, furniture and Fitness equipment.
1.2
WORK RESTRICTIONS
A.
Contractor's Use of Premises: During construction, Contractor will have full use of area
indicated. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or
employ other contractors on portions of Project and as follows:
1.
Driveways, Walkways, and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving existing
building and premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, the public and
emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of
materials.
B.
On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to hours permitted by the regulations
of the City of Miami and the General Conditions, and as noted below, unless otherwise
approved by the Owner.
1.
SUMMARY
Weekend Hours: No work is permitted on Sunday.
011000 - 1
2.
C.
Early Morning Hours: No work is permitted Monday through Friday between the hours
of 6:00 pm and 7:00 am, and Saturday 6:00 pm and 9:00 am.
Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet (8 m) of
entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 011000
SUMMARY
011000 - 2
SECTION 012000 - PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
ALLOWANCES
A.
Advise Architect of the date when selection and purchase of each product or system described
by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work.
B.
At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections.
Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.
C.
Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier.
D.
Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for
use in fulfillment of each allowance.
E.
Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner
or selected by Architect under allowance and shall include taxes, freight and delivery to Project
site.
F.
Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor,
installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials under
allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance.
1.2
UNIT PRICES
A.
Unit price is a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment, or services, or a portion
of the Work, added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if the
scope of Work or estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are
increased or decreased.
B.
Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance,
applicable taxes, overhead, and profit.
C.
Measurement and Payment: See individual Specification Sections for work that requires
establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified
in those Sections.
1.3
ALTERNATES
A.
Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined
in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if
Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be
completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described
in the Contract Documents.
PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
012000 - 1
1.
2.
B.
Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate
work of the alternate into Project.
1.
C.
1.4
Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the
Agreement.
The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract
Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the
Contract Sum.
Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar
items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part
of alternate.
Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in
writing, whether alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A.
Submit a Schedule of Values at least seven days before the initial Application for Payment.
Break down the Contract Sum into at least one line item for each Specification Section in the
Project Manual table of contents. Coordinate the schedule of values with Contractor's
construction schedule.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703.
Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where
Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated
and stored, but not yet installed.
Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials and for
total installed value of that part of the Work.
Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance.
B.
Application for Payment Forms: Use forms provided by Owner as form for Applications for
Payment.
C.
Submit five copies of each application for payment according to the schedule established in
Owner/Contractor Agreement.
1.
2.
3.
Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of
Contractor.
With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from
subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the
previous application.
Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from
every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is
lawfully entitled to a lien.
a.
b.
Include insurance certificates, proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were
paid, and evidence that claims have been settled.
Include affidavit of payment of debts and claims.
PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
012000 - 2
c.
d.
e.
Include affidavit of release of liens.
Include consent of surety to final payment.
Submit final meter readings for utilities, a record of stored fuel, and similar data as
of the date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and
assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A.
Alternate No. 1: Manufactured Stone Veneer.
1.
2.
Base Bid: Provide Manufactured Stone Veneer, including sills and trim as indicated on
the drawings over capillary crystalline waterproofing and as specified in Section 044313Manufactured Stone Veneer and Section 071620-Crystalline Waterproofing.
Alternate: Delete Manufactured Stone Veneer over crystalline waterproofing. Provide
stucco and paint finish where Manufactured Stone Veneer as indicated on the drawings
and as specified in Section 09423-Portland Cement Plaster (Stucco) and 099100-Painting
and Coatings.
END OF SECTION 012000
PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
012000 - 3
SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
A.
Substitutions include changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction
from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
B.
Substitution Requests: Submit four copies of each request for consideration. Identify product
or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and
title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Architect will review proposed substitutions and notify Contractor of their acceptance or
rejection. If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for
evaluation.
1.
D.
Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A or facsimile of form provided in the
Project Manual.
Submit requests within Insert number 30 days after the Notice to Proceed.
Identify product to be replaced and show compliance with requirements for substitutions.
Include a detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those
of the Work specified, a list of changes needed to other parts of the Work required to
accommodate proposed substitution, and any proposed changes in the Contract Sum or
the Contract Time should the substitution be accepted.
Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within
15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or
documentation, whichever is later.
Do not submit unapproved substitutions on Shop Drawings or other submittals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 012500
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
012500 - 1
SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
A.
Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not
involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.
B.
Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed
changes in the Work.
1.
2.
Proposal Requests are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the
proposed change.
Within time specified in Proposal Request or 20 days, when not otherwise specified, after
receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the
Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
C.
Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the
Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect.
D.
On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures
of Owner and Contractor, for all changes to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.
E.
Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive. Construction Change Directive instructs
Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
1.
F.
Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It
also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the
Contract Time.
Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the
Construction Change Directive. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and
supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 012600
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
012600 - 1
SECTION 013000 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
A.
Subcontract List: Submit a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each
portion of the Work.
B.
Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key
personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project
site. List e-mail addresses and telephone numbers.
C.
Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure
efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work.
D.
Requests for Information (RFIs): On discovery of the need for additional information or
interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI. Use
forms acceptable to Architect and Owner.
E.
Schedule and conduct progress meetings at Project site at biweekly intervals. Notify Owner and
Architect of meeting dates and times. Require attendance of each subcontractor or other entity
concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future
activities.
1.
1.2
Architect will record minutes and distribute to all attendees, including Owner and
Architect.
SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Architect's Digital Data Files: Requests for Electronic digital data files of the Contract
Drawings will be considered on a case by case basis and documents may be provided by
Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. Contractor is to submit request for
specific drawing file pertinent to shop drawing preparation.
1.
B.
Architect may furnish Contractor specific digital data drawing files of the Contract
Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings.
a.
The decision to provide digital file data is at the sole discretion of the architect.
No damages or claims will be accepted for failure to provide requested digital data.
b.
Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital
data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.
c.
Contractor shall execute a liability release and/or data licensing agreement in the
form acceptable to the Architect.
Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and
related activities that require sequential activity.
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
013000 - 1
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
Provide a space approximately on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and
approval markings and action taken by Architect. Include the following information on the
label:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit
submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
Submit four copies of each action submittal plus additional copies required for contractor
use. Architect will return one copy.
Submit four copies of each informational submittal. Architect return one copy.
Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor.
Project name.
Date.
Name and address of Contractor.
Name and address of subcontractor or supplier.
Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as
follows:
1.
2.
3.
Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal
requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling
navigation to each item.
Name file with unique identifier, including project identifier, Specification Section
number, and revision identifier.
Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval
markings and action taken by Architect.
E.
Identify options requiring selection by Architect.
F.
Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.
G.
Contractor's Construction Schedule Submittal Procedure:
1.
Submit required submittals in the following format:
a.
b.
c.
Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated.
PDF electronic file.
Three paper copies.
2.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire
schedule for entire construction period.
3.
Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, submittal
schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
013000 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A.
General Submittal Procedure Requirements:
individual Specification Sections.
1.
Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.
a.
2.2
Prepare and submit submittals required by
Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an
electronic Project record document file.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit four paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return
one copy.
B.
Product Data: Mark each copy to show applicable products and options. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Submit
on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 30 by 42 inches (762
by 1067 mm). Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Dimensions and identification of products.
Fabrication and installation drawings and roughing-in and setting diagrams.
Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring.
Notation of coordination requirements.
Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture and for a comparison
of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
Include name of manufacturer and product name on label.
1.
2.3
Manufacturer's written recommendations, product specifications, and installation
instructions.
Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
Printed performance curves and operational range diagrams.
Testing by recognized testing agency.
Compliance with specified standards and requirements.
If variation is inherent in material or product, submit at least three sets of paired units that
show variations.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Informational Submittals: Submit four paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise
indicated. Architect will return one copy.
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
013000 - 3
B.
Qualification Data: Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses,
names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
C.
Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
2.4
DELEGATED DESIGN SERVICES
A.
Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a
design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide
products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
1.
B.
Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required
submittals, submit four copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design
professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or
certified by a design professional.
1.
2.5
If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit
a written request for additional information to Architect.
Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the
Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing
these services.
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A.
Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, schedule in the format
outlined in the General Conditions.
B.
Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of
each week with a continuous vertical line.
C.
Cost Correlation: Superimpose a cost correlation timeline, indicating planned and actual costs.
On the line, show planned and actual dollar volume of the Work performed as of planned and
actual dates used for preparation of payment requests.
D.
Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days
behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by
which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working
hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and indicate
date by which recovery will be accomplished.
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
013000 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SUBMITTAL REVIEW
A.
Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for
compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with
approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B.
Architect will review each action submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications
required, will signify each submittal with an action stamp, and will signify appropriately to
indicate action.
C.
Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will return a copy.
Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.
D.
Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.
3.2
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A.
Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and
activities. Issue schedule a minimum of one day before each regularly scheduled progress
meeting.
1.
B.
As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.
Distribute copies of approved schedule to Owner, Architect, subcontractors, testing and
inspecting agencies, and parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule
responsibility. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties.
END OF SECTION 013000
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
013000 - 5
SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
B.
Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards
establish different or conflicting requirements, comply with the most stringent requirement.
Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision.
C.
Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be
the minimum. The actual installation may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.
Indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of
requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision.
D.
Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction,
submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before
starting work on the following systems:
1.
Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-forceresisting system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect.
E.
Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other
Sections. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
F.
Date of issue.
Project title and number.
Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
Identification of product and Specification Section.
Complete test or inspection data.
Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and
inspecting.
Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
Recommendations on retesting and re-inspecting.
Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, notices, receipts for fee payments, and similar documents,
established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014000 - 1
G.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated.
H.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency with the experience and capability to
conduct testing and inspecting indicated; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction,
that is acceptable to authorities.
I.
Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
J.
Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of
duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1.
2.
3.
K.
Associated Services: Cooperate with testing agencies and provide reasonable auxiliary services
as requested. Provide the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
L.
Access to the Work.
Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment.
Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance
and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and
replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1.
M.
Notify Architect and Contractor of irregularities or deficiencies in the Work observed
during performance of its services.
Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract Documents or
approve or accept any portion of the Work.
Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency and special inspector to
conduct tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction. Refer to General
Conditions for requirements related to Inspection of Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A.
General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014000 - 2
B.
Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION 014000
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014000 - 3
SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless
otherwise indicated.
B.
Abbreviations and Acronyms: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following
list. Names are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date
of the Contract Documents.
AA
Aluminum Association, Inc. (The)
AAADM
American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers
AABC
Associated Air Balance Council
AAMA
American Architectural Manufacturers Association
AASHTO
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
AATCC
American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists
ABAA
Air Barrier Association of America
ABMA
American Bearing Manufacturers Association
ACI
American Concrete Institute
ACPA
American Concrete Pipe Association
AEIC
Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The)
AF&PA
American Forest & Paper Association
AGA
American Gas Association
AHAM
Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers
AHRI
Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute, The
AI
Asphalt Institute
REFERENCES
014200 - 1
AIA
American Institute of Architects (The)
AISC
American Institute of Steel Construction
AISI
American Iron and Steel Institute
AITC
American Institute of Timber Construction
ALSC
American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated
AMCA
Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
AOSA
Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.
APA
Architectural Precast Association
APA
APA - The Engineered Wood Association
API
American Petroleum Institute
ARI
Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute
ARMA
Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association
ASCE
American Society of Civil Engineers
ASCE/SEI
American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute
(See ASCE)
ASHRAE
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers
ASME
ASME International
(American Society of Mechanical Engineers International)
ASSE
American Society of Sanitary Engineering
ASTM
ASTM International
(American Society for Testing and Materials International)
AWCI
Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry
AWCMA
American Window Covering Manufacturers Association
(Now WCMA)
AWI
Architectural Woodwork Institute
AWPA
American Wood Protection Association
(Formerly: American Wood Preservers' Association)
REFERENCES
014200 - 2
AWS
American Welding Society
AWWA
American Water Works Association
BHMA
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
BIA
Brick Industry Association (The)
BICSI
BICSI, Inc.
BIFMA
BIFMA International
(Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association International)
BISSC
Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee
CCC
Carpet Cushion Council
CDA
Copper Development Association
CEA
Canadian Electricity Association
CEA
Consumer Electronics Association
CFFA
Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc.
CGA
Compressed Gas Association
CIMA
Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association
CISCA
Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association
CISPI
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
CLFMI
Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute
CPA
Composite Panel Association
CPPA
Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association
CRI
Carpet and Rug Institute (The)
CRRC
Cool Roof Rating Council
CRSI
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
CSA
Canadian Standards Association
CSA
CSA International
(Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services)
CSI
Cast Stone Institute
REFERENCES
014200 - 3
CSI
Construction Specifications Institute (The)
CSSB
Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau
CTI
Cooling Technology Institute
(Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute)
DHI
Door and Hardware Institute
EIA
Electronic Industries Alliance
EIMA
EIFS Industry Members Association
EJCDC
Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee
EJMA
Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.
ESD
ESD Association
(Electrostatic Discharge Association)
ETL SEMCO
Intertek ETL SEMCO
(Formerly: ITS - Intertek Testing Service NA)
FM Approvals
FM Approvals LLC
FM Global
FM Global
(Formerly: FMG - FM Global)
FRSA
Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc.
FSA
Fluid Sealing Association
FSC
Forest Stewardship Council
GA
Gypsum Association
GANA
Glass Association of North America
GRI
(Part of GSI)
GS
Green Seal
GSI
Geosynthetic Institute
HI
Hydronics Institute
HI/GAMA
Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association
Division of Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI)
HMMA
Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association
REFERENCES
014200 - 4
(Part of NAAMM)
HPVA
Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association
IAPSC
International Association of Professional Security Consultants
ICBO
International Conference of Building Officials
ICEA
Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.
ICPA
International Cast Polymer Association
ICRI
International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The)
IESNA
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
IEST
Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology
IGMA
Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance
ILI
Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.
ISA
Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society, The
ISO
International Organization for Standardization
Available from ANSI
ISSFA
International Solid Surface Fabricators Association
ITS
Intertek Testing Service NA
(Now ETL SEMCO)
ITU
International Telecommunication Union
KCMA
Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association
LGSEA
Light Gauge Steel Engineers Association
LPI
Lightning Protection Institute
MBMA
Metal Building Manufacturers Association
MCA
Metal Construction Association
MFMA
Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.
MFMA
Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.
REFERENCES
014200 - 5
MH
Material Handling
(Now MHIA)
MHIA
Material Handling Industry of America
MIA
Marble Institute of America
MPI
Master Painters Institute
MSS
Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
NAAMM
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
NACE
NACE International
(National Association of Corrosion Engineers International)
NADCA
National Air Duct Cleaners Association
NAGWS
National Association for Girls and Women in Sport
NAIMA
North American Insulation Manufacturers Association
NBGQA
National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.
NCMA
National Concrete Masonry Association
NCTA
National Cable & Telecommunications Association
NEBB
National Environmental Balancing Bureau
NECA
National Electrical Contractors Association
NeLMA
Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NETA
InterNational Electrical Testing Association
NFPA
NFPA
(National Fire Protection Association)
NFRC
National Fenestration Rating Council
NGA
National Glass Association
NHLA
National Hardwood Lumber Association
NLGA
National Lumber Grades Authority
NOFMA
NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association
REFERENCES
014200 - 6
(Formerly: National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association)
NOMMA
National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association
NRCA
National Roofing Contractors Association
NRMCA
National Ready Mixed Concrete Association
NSF
NSF International
(National Sanitation Foundation International)
NSSGA
National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association
NTMA
National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The)
PCI
Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute
PDI
Plumbing & Drainage Institute
PGI
PVC Geomembrane Institute
PTI
Post-Tensioning Institute
RCSC
Research Council on Structural Connections
RFCI
Resilient Floor Covering Institute
RIS
Redwood Inspection Service
SAE
SAE International
SCAQMD
South Coast Air Quality Management District
SCTE
Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers
SDI
Steel Deck Institute
SDI
Steel Door Institute
SEFA
Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association
SEI/ASCE
Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers
(See ASCE)
SIA
Security Industry Association
SJI
Steel Joist Institute
SMA
Screen Manufacturers Association
SMACNA
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'
REFERENCES
014200 - 7
National Association
SMPTE
Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers
SPFA
Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance
(Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray
Polyurethane Foam Division)
SPIB
Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The)
SPRI
Single Ply Roofing Industry
SSINA
Specialty Steel Industry of North America
SSPC
SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings
STI
Steel Tank Institute
SWI
Steel Window Institute
TCNA
Tile Council of North America, Inc.
TEMA
Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association
TIA/EIA
Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance
TMS
The Masonry Society
TPI
Truss Plate Institute, Inc.
TPI
Turfgrass Producers International
TRI
Tile Roofing Institute
UL
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
UNI
Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association
USGBC
U.S. Green Building Council
USITT
United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.
WASTEC
Waste Equipment Technology Association
WCLIB
West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
WCMA
Window Covering Manufacturers Association
WDMA
Window & Door Manufacturers Association
(Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door Association)
REFERENCES
014200 - 8
WI
Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California)
WIC
Woodwork Institute of California
(Now WI)
WMMPA
Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association
WSRCA
Western States Roofing Contractors Association
WWPA
Western Wood Products Association
C.
Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract
Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names,
are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the
Contract Documents.
DIN
Deutsches Institut fur Normung e.V.
IAPMO
International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials
ICC
International Code Council
ICC-ES
DIN
ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.
Deutsches Institut fur Normung e.V.
IAPMO
International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials
ICC
International Code Council
ICC-ES
ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 014200
REFERENCES
014200 - 9
SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Use Charges: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be
included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Water: Available from Owner's existing system without metering and without payment of use
charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.
C.
Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Submit plan showing compliance with requirements
of EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more
stringent.
D.
Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary
electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. Contractor to pay all costs, including
use charges, associated with temporary electric service.
E.
Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC A117.1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
2.2
Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.8-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel,
chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized-steel pipe posts and top
and bottom tension wire and/or top and bottom posts. Provide fabric liner attached to chain-link
fencing.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A.
2.3
Provide field offices, storage and fabrication sheds, and other support facilities as necessary for
construction operations. Store combustible materials apart from building.
EQUIPMENT
A.
Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by
locations and classes of fire exposures.
B.
HVAC Equipment: HVAC system shall not be used during any construction activities that
create dust. Provide temporary covering for all supply and return outlets. After dust creating
activities are completed the Owner may consider allowing use of the permanent HVAC system.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 1
When using permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with
MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system and remove at end of construction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install temporary service.
1.
B.
Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures.
Comply with regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and
maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
1.
Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will NOT be permitted.
C.
Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required for curing or drying of
completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low
temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on
completed installations or elements being installed.
D.
Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for
construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.
3.2
SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
Install project identification and other signs in locations approved by Owner to inform the
public and persons seeking entrance to Project.
B.
Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle
waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
3.3
SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply
with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil
contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.
B.
Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and
airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent properties and walkways.
C.
Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line
of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root
systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 2
D.
Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and
harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control
procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial
Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.
E.
Furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from
easily entering site except by entrance gates.
F.
Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.
G.
Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from
exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary
weather tight enclosure for building exterior.
H.
Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities. Comply with NFPA 241.
3.4
MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL
A.
Before installation of weather barriers, protect materials from water damage and keep porous
and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete.
1.
2.
3.
B.
After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building,
protect as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.5
Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water.
Remove standing water from decks.
Keep deck openings covered or dammed.
Do not load or install drywall or porous materials into partially enclosed building.
Discard water-damaged material.
Do not install material that is wet.
Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold.
Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before
enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes.
OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A.
Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B.
Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced
by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion.
C.
At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during
construction period.
END OF SECTION 015000
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 3
SECTION 01 56 39 - TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
A. SUMMARY
1.
Protection of existing trees and plants from damage because of contractor operations, to
include protection fencing, root pruning and root protection.
B. SUBMITTALS
1.
Proposed methods and schedule for tree protection.
2.
Proposed methods, materials and schedule for root pruning, construction pruning and tree
fertilization.
C. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.
Trees scheduled to remain that are damaged during the construction shall be replaced with the
canopy/ caliper equivalency of the damaged tree at no expense to the Owner.
D. MATERIALS
1.
2.
Tree Protection Fencing: shall be as per details in contract documents.
Soil Materials
a.
Sand shall be well washed medium to coarse sand free of silt and sludge.
b.
Muck: shall be peat material removed from areas marked “Florida Everglades Peat” on
Soil Conservation Service Soil maps.
3.
Planting Soil
a.
Planting soil shall be a mixture of 80% sand and 20% muck by volume.
b.
Planting soil PH needs to be tested and amended as needed to fall within the range of 5.5
to 6.5 PH.
4.
Fertilizers: liquid fertilizer applied to root pruned and construction pruned trees shall be Peters
M77, Sequestered-Cleated Soluble Fertilizer or equal.
5.
Mulches: Mulch shall be Florimulch or approved equal. Approved equal shall follow the
following specification:
a.
During processing, raw materials shall be stacked and stored in curing piles for no less
than 120 days.
b.
Mulch shall be made entirely from the above ground portion wood and bark of the
Melaleuca quinquenervia Tree. It shall not contain more than 10% (by volume) bark and
shall not contain roots or root pieces. Shreds and chips shall not be larger than 3/4 inch
diameter and 1 1/2 inch in length. Mulch shall be free of weed seeds, soil and on other
organic or inorganic material.
TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
01 56 39 - 1
c.
Prior to its final processing, mulch will have been inspected and certified by the Florida
Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services, Division of Plant Industry, as free of
burrowing nematodes. All proofs of delivery shall bear the official State of Florida stamp
of inspection and verification.
E. INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Before start of demolition and clearing operations, tree protection fencing shall be installed.
Fencing shall be installed at the edge of the dripline to all trees to be protected.
Where construction will occur close to existing trees designated to be protected, roots shall be
pruned as determined by Landscape Architect.
If root pruning is required, top of tree shall be pruned to compensate for damaged root zone
area.
Treat root pruned trees with liquid fertilizer and insecticide.
Tree protection shall be removed after all work which may damage the trees is completed.
END OF SECTION 01 56 39
TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
01 56 39 - 2
SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar
intent.
B.
Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product.
Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced.
1.
2.
Show compliance with requirements for comparable product requests.
Architect will review the proposed product and notify Contractor of its acceptance or
rejection.
C.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Show compliance with requirements.
D.
Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more
products, select product compatible with products previously selected.
E.
Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F.
Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
Deliver products to Project site in manufacturer's original sealed container or packaging,
complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and
installing.
Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to
ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weather tight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A.
Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged, and, unless
otherwise indicated, are new at the time of installation.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
016000 - 1
1.
2.
3.
B.
Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, and other devices and
components needed for a complete installation and the intended use and effect.
Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make
selection.
Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish salient characteristics of products.
Where the following headings are used to list products or manufacturers, the Contractor's
options for product selection are as follows:
1.
Products:
a.
b.
2.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
3.
Where requirements include "one of the following," provide one of the products
listed that complies with requirements.
Where requirements do not include "one of the following," provide one of the
products listed that complies with requirements or a comparable product.
Where requirements include "one of the following," provide a product that
complies with requirements by one of the listed manufacturers.
Where requirements do not include "one of the following," provide a product that
complies with requirements by one of the listed manufacturers or another
manufacturer.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide the product named, or indicated on the Drawings, or a
comparable product by one of the listed manufacturers.
C.
Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample," provide a product that complies with
requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a
proposed product matches.
D.
Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select
color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both
standard and premium items.
2.2
COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A.
Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following
conditions are satisfied:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents,
that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results,
and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications.
List of similar installations for completed projects, if requested.
Samples, if requested.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
016000 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 016000
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
016000 - 3
SECTION 017000 - EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of
improvements comply with requirements.
B.
Cutting and Patching:
1.
2.
3.
C.
1.2
Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of
locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding.
Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching.
Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components
in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that result in
increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner
that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written
recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.
B.
Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.
C.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit one copy of manual.
D.
PDF Electronic File: Assemble manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on
digital media.
E.
Record Drawings: Submit one set(s) of marked-up record prints.
F.
Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy and annotated PDF electronic files and
directories of each submittal.
1.3
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A.
Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list,
and reasons why the Work is not complete.
B.
Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion:
inspection, complete the following:
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
Before requesting Substantial Completion
017000 - 1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion:
inspection, complete the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
D.
1.4
Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner
unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy
permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
Submit closeout submittals specified in other sections, including project record
documents, operation and maintenance manuals, property surveys, similar final record
information, warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
Submit maintenance material submittals specified in other sections, including tools, spare
parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect.
Submit test/adjust/balance records.
Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
Before requesting Substantial Completion
Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner.
Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.
Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion.
Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency
responders.
Remove temporary facilities and controls.
Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of
request, Architect will proceed with inspection or advise Contractor of unfulfilled requirements.
Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will advise
Contractor of items that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A.
Submittals Prior to Final Completion:
completion, complete the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Before requesting inspection for determining final
Submit a final Application for Payment.
Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be
completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of
the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved.
Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage
complying with insurance requirements.
Submit pest-control final inspection report.
Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect
will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect
will prepare final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will advise Contractor of items that
must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
017000 - 2
1.
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed
surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent
possible.
B.
Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
1.
2.2
Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not
applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum
allowable VOC levels.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION
A.
Directory:
Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and
maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to
desired information.
B.
Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize manual into separate sections for each
system and subsystem, and separate sections for each piece of equipment not part of a system.
C.
Organize data into three-ring binders with identification on front and spine of each binder, and
envelopes for folded drawings. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.3
Manufacturer's operation and maintenance documentation.
Maintenance and service schedules.
Maintenance service contracts. Include name and telephone number of service agent.
Emergency instructions.
Spare parts list and local sources of maintenance materials.
Wiring diagrams.
Copies of warranties. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for
warranty claims
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
Record Prints: Maintain a set of prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings,
incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued. Mark to show actual
installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Accurately record information
in an acceptable drawing technique.
1.
Record drawings are to be updated at a minimum weekly.
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
017000 - 3
B.
2.
Review markings with Architect and Owner at Project Meetings.
3.
Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location.
Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial
Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A.
Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate
and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical
systems, and other construction affecting the Work.
B.
Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions,
with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
1.
2.
3.
Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates.
Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems.
Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
D.
Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Where portions of the Work are
indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field
measurements before fabrication.
E.
Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.
3.2
CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT AND FIELD ENGINEERING
A.
Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in
relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks.
B.
Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.
C.
Engage a land surveyor to prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real
property) for Project and finish floor elevations.
1.
At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities
having jurisdiction as the official "property survey."
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
017000 - 4
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.
Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches (2440 mm) in occupied spaces and
90 inches (2300 mm) in unoccupied spaces.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.
C.
Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or
loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
D.
Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be
factory prepared and field installed.
E.
Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size
and number to securely anchor each component in place. Where size and type of attachments
are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.
1.
Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
F.
Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
G.
Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.
3.4
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
Provide temporary support of work to be cut.
B.
Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
C.
Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass
such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas.
D.
Cutting: Cut in-place construction using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction.
1.
E.
Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of
adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with
installation requirements specified in other Sections.
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
017000 - 5
1.
2.
3.
3.5
Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into adjoining
construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing.
Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch
and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform
finish, color, texture, and appearance.
Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and
intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint
coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until
patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
CLEANING
A.
Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas.
lawfully.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Remove liquid spills promptly.
Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the
entire work area, as appropriate.
Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of
Substantial Completion:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
3.6
Dispose of materials
Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities.
Sweep paved areas; remove stains, spills, and foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are
neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.
Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.
Remove labels that are not permanent.
Clean transparent materials, including mirrors. Remove excess glazing compounds.
Clean exposed finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains, films, and foreign
substances. Sweep concrete floors broom clean.
Vacuum carpeted surfaces and wax resilient flooring.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and
foreign substances. Clean plumbing fixtures. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and
reflectors.
Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of
diffusers, registers, and grills.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL PREPARATION
A.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance
data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment
not part of a system.
B.
Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include
only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each
product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a
tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents.
Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
017000 - 6
1.
C.
3.7
Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are unavailable and
where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or
systems.
Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the
relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and
flow diagrams.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A.
Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain
systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. Include a detailed review of the
following:
1.
Include instruction for basis of system design and operational requirements, review of
documentation, emergency procedures, operations, adjustments, troubleshooting,
maintenance, and repairs.
END OF SECTION 017000
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
017000 - 7
SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
B.
Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within seven days of date established for
commencement of the Work.
Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Submit concurrent with each Application for
Payment. Include total quantity of waste, total quantity of waste salvaged and recycled,
and percentage of total waste salvaged and recycled.
Records of Donations and Sales: Receipts for salvageable waste donated or sold to
individuals and organizations. . Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.
Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and
invoices.
Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and
invoices.
Statement of Refrigerant Recovery:
Signed by refrigerant recovery technician
responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was
recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations.
C.
Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications:
program.
D.
Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements in Section 013000 "Administrative Requirements." Review methods and
procedures related to waste management.
E.
Waste Management Plan: Develop a waste management plan consisting of waste identification,
waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Indicate quantities by weight or volume,
but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Certified by EPA-approved certification
Salvaged Materials for Reuse: Identify materials that will be salvaged and reused.
Salvaged Materials for Sale: Identify materials that will be sold to individuals and
organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
Salvaged Materials for Donation: Identify materials that will be donated to individuals
and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled
materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
Cost/Revenue Analysis: Indicate total cost of waste disposal as if there was no waste
management plan and net additional cost or net savings resulting from implementing
waste management plan.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
017419 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 50 percent by weight of total
nonhazardous solid waste generated by the Work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A.
General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage,
signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan
during the entire duration of the Contract.
B.
Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management
procedures, as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site.
1.
3.2
Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review
plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.
SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE
A.
Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work: Clean salvaged items and install salvaged items to
comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment.
B.
Salvaged Items for Sale and Donation: Not permitted on Project site.
C.
Salvaged Items for Owner's Use: Clean salvaged items and store in a secure area until delivery
to Owner.
D.
Doors and Hardware: Brace open end of door frames. Except for removing door closers, leave
door hardware attached to doors.
E.
Equipment: Drain tanks, piping, and fixtures. Seal openings with caps or plugs.
F.
Plumbing Fixtures: Separate by type and size.
G.
Lighting Fixtures: Separate lamps by type and protect from breakage.
3.3
RECYCLING WASTE
A.
General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.
B.
Packaging:
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
017419 - 2
1.
2.
3.
4.
Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry
location.
Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.
Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from
Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood
pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.
Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements
for recycling wood.
C.
Asphaltic Concrete Paving: Grind asphalt to maximum 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) size.
D.
Asphaltic Concrete Paving: Break up and transport paving to asphalt-recycling facility.
E.
Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other metals.
1.
F.
Masonry: Remove metal reinforcement, anchors, and ties from masonry and sort with other
metals.
1.
2.
G.
Pulverize concrete to maximum 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) size.
Pulverize masonry to maximum 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) size.
Clean and stack undamaged, whole masonry units on wood pallets.
Wood Materials:
1.
2.
3.
Sort and stack reusable members according to size, type, and length. Separate lumber,
engineered wood products, panel products, and treated wood materials.
Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces.
Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.
H.
Metals: Separate metals by type.
I.
Asphalt Shingle Roofing: Remove and dispose of nails, staples, and accessories.
J.
Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry
location. Remove edge trim and sort with other metals. Remove and dispose of fasteners.
K.
Acoustical Ceiling Panels and Tile: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry
location.
L.
Metal Suspension System: Separate metal members including trim, and other metals from
acoustical panels and tile and sort with other metals.
M.
Carpet and Pad: Roll large pieces tightly after removing debris, trash, adhesive, and tack strips.
1.
Store clean, dry carpet and pad in a closed container or trailer provided by Carpet
Reclamation Agency or carpet recycler.
N.
Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by type and size. Separate supports,
hangers, valves, sprinklers, and other components by type and size.
O.
Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight lengths and store by type and size.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
017419 - 3
3.4
DISPOSAL OF WASTE
A.
Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste
materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Do not burn waste materials.
END OF SECTION 017419
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
017419 - 4
SECTION 018113 - SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Definitions:
1.
2.
Regional Materials: Materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well
as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site. If only a fraction of a
product or material is extracted/harvested/recovered and manufactured locally, then only
that percentage (by weight) shall contribute to the regional value.
Recycled Content: The recycled content shall be determined by weight.
a.
b.
"Post-consumer" material is defined as waste material generated by end users of
the product, which can no longer be used for its intended purpose.
"Pre-consumer" material is defined as material diverted from the waste stream
during the manufacturing process. Excluded is reutilization of materials such as
scrap generated in a process that is reclaimed in the same process that generated it.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
2.2
Provide products and procedures necessary to meet requirements of this Section. Although
other Sections may specify similar requirements, the Contractor shall determine additional
materials and procedures necessary to comply with this Section.
LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS
A.
Adhesives and sealants shall comply with the following limits for VOC content:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Wood Glues: 30 g/L.
Metal-to-Metal Adhesives: 30 g/L.
Adhesives for Porous Materials (Except Wood): 50 g/L.
Subfloor Adhesives: 50 g/L.
Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L.
Carpet Adhesives: 50 g/L.
Carpet Pad Adhesives: 50 g/L.
VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L.
Cove Base Adhesives: 50 g/L.
Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L.
Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L.
Ceramic Tile Adhesives: 65 g/L.
Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L.
Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L.
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
018113 - 1
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
B.
Contact Adhesive: 80 g/L.
Structural Glazing Adhesives: 100 g/L.
Wood Flooring Adhesive: 100 g/L.
Structural Wood Member Adhesive: 140 g/L.
Single-Ply Roof Membrane Adhesive: 250 g/L.
Special-Purpose Contact Adhesive (contact adhesive that is used to bond melamine
covered board, metal, unsupported vinyl, PTFE, ultra-high molecular weight
polyethylene, rubber or wood veneer 1/16 inch or less in thickness to any surface):
250 g/L.
Top and Trim Adhesive: 250 g/L.
Plastic Cement Welding Compounds: 250 g/L.
ABS Welding Compounds: 325 g/L.
CPVC Welding Compounds: 490 g/L.
PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L.
Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 550 g/L.
Sheet-Applied Rubber Lining Adhesive: 850 g/L.
Aerosol Adhesive, General-Purpose Mist Spray: 65 percent by weight.
Aerosol Adhesive, General-Purpose Web Spray: 55 percent by weight.
Special-Purpose Aerosol Adhesive (All Types): 70 percent by weight.
Other Adhesives: 250 g/L.
Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L.
Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L.
Other Sealants: 420 g/L.
Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
Modified Bituminous Sealant Primers: 500 g/L.
Other Sealant Primers: 750 g/L.
Exterior adhesives and sealants shall comply with Green Seal's GS-36 and the following limits
for VOC content:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Construction Adhesives: 75 g/L.
Reactive sealants: 50 g/L.
Other Caulks and Sealants: 30 g/L.
Contact Adhesives: 480 g/L.
C.
Interior adhesives and sealants shall comply with Green Seal's GS-36 and with the testing and
product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for
the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers."
D.
Paints and coatings shall comply with the following limits for VOC content:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.
Nonflat Paints, Coatings: 150 g/L.
Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L.
Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L.
Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L.
Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.
Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes: 350 g/L.
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
018113 - 2
8.
9.
10.
E.
Clear Wood Finishes, Lacquers: 550 g/L.
Floor Coatings: 100 g/L.
Stains: 250 g/L.
Composite wood and agrifiber products and adhesives shall not contain urea-formaldehyde
resin.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
REFRIGERANT REMOVAL
A.
3.2
Remove and contain CFC-based refrigerants from existing HVAC&R equipment being
discarded.
CONSTRUCTION INDOOR-AIR-QUALITY MANAGEMENT
A.
Comply with SMACNA's "SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings under
Construction."
1.
2.
B.
If Owner authorizes use of permanent heating, cooling, and ventilating systems during
construction period as specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls,"
install filter media having a MERV 8 according to ASHRAE 52.2 at each return-air inlet
for the air-handling system used during construction.
Replace all air filters immediately prior to occupancy.
After construction ends, prior to occupancy and with all interior finishes installed, perform a
building flush-out by supplying a total volume of 14000 cu. ft. (4 300 000 L) of outdoor air per
sq. ft. (sq. m) of floor area while maintaining an internal temperature of at least 60 deg F (16
deg C) and a relative humidity no higher than 60 percent.
END OF SECTION 018113
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
018113 - 3
SECTION 023000 - EARTHWORK FOR BUILDINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B.
Subsurface Exploration Report prepared by Ardaman & Associates, Inc., dated, October 11,
2012.
1.02
A.
SUMMARY
This section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.03
A.
Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-ground.
Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.
Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches within buildings.
DEFINITIONS
Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.
1.
2.
Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to
support sides of pipe.
Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
B.
Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.
D.
Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
E.
Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and
dimensions indicated.
F.
Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
G.
Structures: Buildings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, curbs, pads for mechanical and
electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the
ground surface.
H.
Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or
backfill.
I.
Utilities: Underground services within buildings.
EARTHWORK FOR BUILDINGS
023000-1
1.04
A.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For the following:
1.
B.
Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results
for compliance of the following with requirements indicated:
1.
2.
1.05
A.
Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site and borrow soil material
proposed for fill and backfill.
Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557 for each on-site and borrow
soil material proposed for fill and backfill.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary
utility services according to requirements indicated.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Controlled low-strength material, including design mixture.
Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating.
Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be
removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
SOIL MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not
available from excavations.
B.
Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM,
or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches (75 mm) in any
dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.
C.
Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT
according to ASTM D 2487 or a combination of these groups.
1.
D.
Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of
optimum moisture content at time of compaction.
Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch
(37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
EARTHWORK FOR BUILDINGS
023000-2
E.
2.02
A.
Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch
(25-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
CONTROLLED LOW-STRENGTH MATERIAL
Controlled Low-Strength Material:
material as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Low-density, self-compacting, flowable concrete
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II.
Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F.
Normal-Weight Aggregate:
ASTM C 33, 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal maximum
aggregate size.
Foaming Agent: ASTM C 869.
Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
Produce conventional-weight, controlled low-strength material with 140-psi (965-kPa)
compressive strength when tested according to ASTM C 495.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A.
Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork
operations.
B.
Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil,
debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in another
Division 2 Section and in the Subsurface Exploration Report prepared by Ardaman &
Associates, dated October 11, 2012.
C.
Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earthwork operations.
3.02
DEWATERING
A.
Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on
prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.
B.
Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water
accumulation.
1.
Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to
accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.
EARTHWORK FOR BUILDINGS
023000-3
C.
3.03
A.
Pump out any standing water in footing excavations prior to casting footings.
pumping until foundation is fully cast.
EXCAVATION, GENERAL
Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and
subsurface conditions encountered. Excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and
obstructions.
2.
3.04
A.
If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials
and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.
EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25
mm). If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and
removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.
1.
2.
3.05
Maintain
Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation.
Excavate by hand tools to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim
bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility
Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or
minus 1 inch (25 mm). Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing
surfaces.
EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES WITHIN BUILDINGS
A.
Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.
B.
Provide all appropriate excavation stabilization and bracing.
C.
Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or
conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher
than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
D.
Clearance: 12 inches (300 mm) each side of pipe or conduit or as otherwise indicated.
Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of
pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels
of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp
objects along trench subgrade.
1.
For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter and flatbottomed, multiple-duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support pipe
and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade.
EARTHWORK FOR BUILDINGS
023000-4
2.
E.
3.06
For pipes and conduit 6 inches (150 mm) or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of
trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped
sand backfill.
Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches (100 mm) deeper than bottom of pipe elevation to
allow for bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe.
SUBGRADE INSPECTION
A.
Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade.
B.
If Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with
compacted backfill or fill material as directed.
C.
Proof-roll subgrade below slabs with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets
and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.
1.
2.
D.
3.07
A.
Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or
construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation.
STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing.
Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to
prevent
windblown
dust.
1.
3.08
A.
Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
BACKFILL
Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Completely proof-roll subgrade. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h).
Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as
determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.
Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing
and waterproofing.
Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents.
Testing and inspecting underground utilities.
Removing concrete formwork.
Removing trash and debris.
Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.
Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.
Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
EARTHWORK FOR BUILDINGS
023000-5
3.9
UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A.
Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B.
Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding
course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints,
fittings, and bodies of conduits.
C.
Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches (450 mm) of bottom of
footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is
specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete.”
D.
Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil, free of particles larger than 1 inch (25
mm) in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the utility pipe or conduit.
1.
Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both
sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or
displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.
E.
Controlled Low-Strength Material: Place initial backfill of controlled low-strength material to a
height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the utility pipe or conduit.
F.
Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while installing and removing shoring and bracing.
G.
Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.
H.
Controlled Low-Strength Material: Place final backfill of controlled low-strength material to
final subgrade elevation.
3.10
SOIL FILL
A.
Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so
material will bond with existing material.
B.
Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
3.11
A.
fill
SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL
Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before
compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
1.
2.
Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain
frost or ice.
Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that
exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified
dry unit weight.
EARTHWORK FOR BUILDINGS
023000-6
3.12
COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS
A.
Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 12 inches (300 mm) in loose depth
for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 6 inches (150 mm)
in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
B.
Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and
uniformly along the full length of each structure.
C.
Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight
according to ASTM D 1557:
1.
3.13
A.
GRADING
General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply
with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations
indicated.
1.
2.
B.
3.14
95 percent.
Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.
Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface
tolerances.
Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch (13 mm) when tested
with a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering
testing agency to perform field quality-control testing and inspection.
B.
Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with
subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with
requirements.
C.
Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed
to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing
subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when
approved by Architect.
D.
Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556,
ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at
the following locations and frequencies:
1.
2.
Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least 1
test for every 2000 sq. ft. (186 sq. m) or less of building slab, but in no case fewer than 3
tests.
Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and subsequent backfill layer, at least 1 test
for each 150 feet (46 m) or less of trench length, but no fewer than 2 tests.
EARTHWORK FOR BUILDINGS
023000-7
E.
3.15
When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of
compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth
required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
PROTECTION
A.
Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and
Keep free of trash and debris.
B.
Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed
surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent
construction operations or weather conditions.
1.
C.
Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and
recompact.
Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,
backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1.
3.16
erosion.
Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,
and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A.
Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory
soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.
B.
Disposal: Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property.
Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Architect.
1.
Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally
dispose of it off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 02300
EARTHWORK FOR BUILDINGS
023000-8
SECTION 024113 - SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
Submit proposed salvage, demolition and removal procedures to the Architect/Engineer before work
is started. Procedures shall provide for careful removal and disposition of materials specified to be
salvaged, coordination with other work in progress, a disconnection schedule of utility services, a
detailed description of methods and equipment to be used for each operation and of the sequence of
operations.
REQUIREMENTS
The work includes demolition or removal of all construction indicated or specified. Do not begin
demolition until authorization is received from the Owner; refer to paragraph "Title to Materials,"
hereinafter. Remove rubbish and debris from the site daily, unless otherwise approved. Store
materials that cannot be removed daily in areas specified by the Owner.
DUST CONTROL
Take appropriate action to check the spread of dust to occupied portions of the site and to avoid the
creation of a nuisance in the surrounding area. Do not use water if it results in hazardous or
objectionable conditions, such as flooding, or pollution. Comply with all dust regulations imposed
by local air pollution agencies.
PROTECTION
A.
Existing Work: Protect existing work which is to remain in place, that is to be reused, or which is to
remain the property of the Owner by temporary covers, shoring, bracing, and supports. Items which
are to remain and which are to be salvaged and which are damaged during performance of the work
shall be repaired to their original condition or replaced with new.
B.
Trees: Protect trees within the project site that might be damaged during demolition and that are
indicated to be left in place. Restore trees scarred or damaged by Contractor equipment or operations
to a satisfactory condition or replace as determined by the Owner.
C.
Facilities: Protect all electrical and mechanical services and utilities. Where removal of existing
utilities and pavement is specified or indicated, provide approved barricades, temporary covering of
exposed areas, and temporary services or connections for electrical and mechanical utilities.
1.5
A.
1.6
A.
EXPLOSIVES
Use of explosives will not be permitted.
BURNING
Burning will not be permitted.
SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
1
024113 -
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXISTING FACILITIES TO BE REMOVED
A.
Utilities and Related Equipment: Remove all existing utilities uncovered by work and terminate in a
manner conforming to the nationally recognized code covering the specific utility and satisfactory to
the Architect/Engineer. Remove meters and related equipment and deliver to a location in
accordance with instructions of the Owner. Dispose of utility lines encountered that are not shown
on the Drawings in accordance with instructions of the Architect/Engineer.
B.
Paving: Remove concrete and asphaltic concrete paving including aggregate base as indicated.
3.2
DISPOSITION OF MATERIAL
A.
Title to Materials: Except where indicated otherwise or specifically specified otherwise in other
sections, all materials and equipment removed, and not reused, shall become the property of the
Contractor and shall be removed from the site. Title to all materials resulting from demolition, and
all materials and equipment to be removed, is vested in the Contractor upon approval by the
Architect/Engineer of the Contractor's demolition and removal procedures, and authorization by the
Owner to begin demolition. The Owner will not be responsible for the condition or loss of, or
damage to, such property after notice to proceed. Materials and equipment shall not be viewed by
prospective purchasers or sold on the site.
B.
Reuse of Materials and Equipment: Carefully remove and store materials and equipment to be reused
or relocated to prevent damage, and reinstall as the work progresses.
C.
Salvaged Materials and Equipment: Carefully remove materials and equipment that are indicated to
be removed by the Contractor and that are to remain the property of the Owner, and deliver to a
storage site as directed.
3.3
CLEANUP
A.
Debris and Rubbish: Remove and transport debris and rubbish in a manner that will prevent spillage
on streets or adjacent areas. Clean up spillage from streets and adjacent areas. Other applicable
requirements are included under Section 311000, Site Clearing.
B.
Regulations: Comply with Federal, State, and local hauling and disposal regulations.
END OF SECTION
SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
2
024113 -
SECTION 024116 - STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Demolition and removal of buildings.
Removing below-grade construction.
Salvaging items for reuse by Owner.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.3
Section 24113-Selective Site Demolition, Sitework and utility demolition.
MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A.
Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones
and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to
Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner.
1.
1.4
Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Proposed Protection Measures: Submit informational report, including Drawings, that indicates
the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection
, for dust control and , for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of
barriers.
B.
Schedule of building demolition with starting and ending dates for each activity.
C.
Inventory of items to be removed and salvaged.
D.
Predemolition photographs or video.
E.
Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications:
program.
STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
Certified by EPA-approved certification
024116 - 1
B.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
beginning demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
C.
Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
D.
Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Buildings to be demolished will be vacated and their use discontinued before start of the Work.
B.
Buildings immediately adjacent to demolition area will be occupied.
demolition so operations of occupied buildings will not be disrupted.
1.
2.
Provide not less than 72 hours' notice of activities that will affect operations of adjacent
occupied buildings.
Maintain access to existing walkways, exits, and other facilities used by occupants of
adjacent buildings.
a.
C.
Conduct building
Do not close or obstruct walkways, exits, or other facilities used by occupants of
adjacent buildings without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction.
Owner assumes no responsibility for buildings and structures to be demolished.
1.
Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by
Owner as far as practical.
D.
Hazardous Materials: An Asbestos Survey was performed by ETS Environment, Inc. ETS
Environment, Inc. report #FL12-0796PDAS, dated October 3, 2012 advises that asbestos
containing materials were not identified on the existing Community Center Building. It is not
expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.
1.
If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb;
immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by
Owner under a separate contract.
E.
On-site storage or sale of removed items or materials is not permitted.
F.
Arrange demolition schedule so as not to interfere with operations of adjacent occupied
buildings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SOIL MATERIALS
A.
Satisfactory Soils: Comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
024116 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting demolition operations.
B.
Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment according to 40 CFR 82 and
regulations of authorities having jurisdiction before starting demolition.
B.
Existing Utilities: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving
buildings and structures to be demolished.
1.
Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
2.
If removal, relocation, or abandonment of utility services will affect adjacent occupied
buildings, then provide temporary utilities that bypass buildings and structures to be
demolished and that maintain continuity of service to other buildings and structures.
3.
Cut off pipe or conduit a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) below grade. Cap, valve, or
plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing according to
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
4.
Do not start demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed.
C.
Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural
support to preserve stability and prevent unexpected movement or collapse of construction
being demolished.
D.
Salvaged Items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.3
Clean salvaged items of dirt and demolition debris.
Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
Transport items to storage area.
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
PROTECTION
A.
Existing Facilities: Protect adjacent walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other
building facilities during demolition operations. Maintain exits from existing buildings.
B.
Existing Utilities: Maintain utility services to remain and protect from damage during
demolition operations. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving adjacent occupied or operating
facilities unless authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Temporary Protection: Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies,
and covered passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction and as indicated.
Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities And Controls."
STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
024116 - 3
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
3.4
Protect adjacent buildings and facilities from damage due to demolition activities.
Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain.
Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip
line of groups of trees to remain.
Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people
and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around building demolition area and
to and from occupied portions of adjacent buildings and structures.
Protect walls, windows, roofs, and other adjacent exterior construction that are to remain
and that are exposed to building demolition operations.
Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust, noise, and
dirt migration to occupied portions of adjacent buildings.
Remove temporary barriers and protections where hazards no longer exist. Where open
excavations or other hazardous conditions remain, leave temporary barriers and protections in
place.
DEMOLITION
A.
General: Demolish indicated buildings and site improvements completely.
required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Use methods
Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. Maintain
portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
Maintain fire watch during and for at least 24 hours after flame cutting operations.
Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
Locate building demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct building demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1.
2.
Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used
facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide
alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having
jurisdiction.
Use water mist and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with
governing environmental-protection regulations.
C.
Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted.
D.
Proceed with demolition of structural framing members systematically, from higher to lower
level. Complete building demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing
supporting members on the next lower level.
E.
Remove debris from elevated portions of the building by chute, hoist, or other device that will
convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
F.
Demolish foundation walls and other below-grade construction of existing Community Center.
STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
024116 - 4
1.
Remove below-grade construction, including basements, foundation walls, and footings,
completely.
G.
Below-Grade Areas: Completely fill below-grade areas and voids resulting from building
demolition operations with satisfactory soil materials according to backfill requirements in
Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
H.
Site Grading: Uniformly rough grade area of demolished construction to a smooth surface, free
from irregular surface changes. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades
and new grades.
I.
Promptly repair damage to adjacent buildings caused by demolition operations.
3.5
CLEANING
A.
Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPAapproved landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. See Division 01 Section
"Construction Waste Management and Disposal" for recycling and disposal of demolition
waste.
B.
Do not burn demolished materials.
C.
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by building
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before building demolition
operations began.
END OF SECTION 024116
STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
024116 - 5
SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials,
mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the
following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blastfurnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when
characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances
warrant adjustments.
1.
Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.
C.
Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and
placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar
diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing,
and supports for concrete reinforcement.
D.
Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the
structure.
1.
1.5
Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:
1.
Cementitious materials.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 1
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
B.
Admixtures.
Form materials and form-release agents.
Steel reinforcement and accessories.
Curing compounds.
Floor and slab treatments.
Bonding agents.
Adhesives.
Vapor retarders.
Joint-filler strips.
Repair materials.
Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating
compliance with requirements:
1.
Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of
concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity.
C.
Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified
tolerances.
D.
Field quality-control reports.
E.
Minutes of preinstallation conference.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as
ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified
Concrete Flatwork Technician.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete
products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and
equipment.
1.
C.
ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract
Documents:
1.
2.
D.
Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete
Production Facilities."
ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5.
ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.
Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine
procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each
entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:
a.
Contractor's superintendent.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 2
b.
c.
d.
2.
1.7
Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.
Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.
Concrete subcontractor.
Review testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete
finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing procedures,
construction, contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips, forms and form
removal limitations, shoring and reshoring procedures, vapor-retarder installation, anchor
rod and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, floor
and slab flatness and levelness measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete
protection.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and
damage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A.
Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide
lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
B.
Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum.
C.
Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,
stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of
concrete surfaces.
1.
D.
Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic
form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of
concrete on removal.
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane
of exposed concrete surface.
Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in
diameter in concrete surface.
Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing
or waterproofing.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.
B.
Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, as drawn.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 3
C.
Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from asdrawn steel wire into flat sheets.
D.
Galvanized-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from
galvanized-steel wire into flat sheets.
2.3
REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A.
Zinc Repair Material: ASTM A 780, zinc-based solder, paint containing zinc dust, or sprayed
zinc.
B.
Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel
wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater
compressive strength than concrete and as follows:
1.
2.4
For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use
CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and
source, throughout Project:
1.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, Supplement with the following:
a.
b.
Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F.
Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.
B.
Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica.
C.
Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 1N coarse aggregate or better, graded.
Provide aggregates from a single source.
1.
2.
D.
2.5
Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) nominal.
Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.
ADMIXTURES
A.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
B.
Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with
other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those
permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium
chloride.
1.
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 4
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.6
Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture:
ASTM C 494/C 494M,
Type G.
Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
2.7
Sheet Vapor Retarder: Polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils (0.25 mm)
thick.
LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS
A.
VOC Content: Liquid floor treatments shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
B.
Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Clear, chemically reactive, waterborne solution of
inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; that penetrates,
hardens, and densifies concrete surfaces.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
2.8
ChemMasters; Chemisil Plus.
ChemTec Int'l; ChemTec One.
Conspec by Dayton Superior; Intraseal.
Curecrete Distribution Inc.; Ashford Formula.
Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Sure Hard (J-17).
Edoco by Dayton Superior; Titan Hard.
Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Euco Diamond Hard.
Kaufman Products, Inc.; SureHard.
L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Seal Hard.
Meadows, W. R., Inc.; LIQUI-HARD.
Metalcrete Industries; Floorsaver.
Nox-Crete Products Group; Duro-Nox.
Symons by Dayton Superior; Buff Hard.
US SPEC, Division of US Mix Products Company; US SPEC Industraseal.
Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Vexcon StarSeal PS Clear.
CURING MATERIALS
A.
Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application
to fresh concrete.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 5
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; CATEXOL CimFilm.
BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Confilm.
ChemMasters; SprayFilm.
Conspec by Dayton Superior; Aquafilm.
Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film (J-74).
Edoco by Dayton Superior; BurkeFilm.
Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Eucobar.
Kaufman Products, Inc.; Vapor-Aid.
Lambert Corporation; LAMBCO Skin.
L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-CON.
Meadows, W. R., Inc.; EVAPRE.
Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold.
Nox-Crete Products Group; MONOFILM.
Sika Corporation; SikaFilm.
SpecChem, LLC; Spec Film.
Symons by Dayton Superior; Finishing Aid.
TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2120 TRI-FILM.
Unitex; PRO-FILM.
Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Envio Set.
B.
Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.
C.
Moisture-Retaining Cover:
sheet.
D.
Water: Potable.
E.
Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,
dissipating.
1.
ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Curing Compound #2 DR WB.
BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure 200.
ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear.
Conspec by Dayton Superior; W.B. Resin Cure.
Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W).
Edoco by Dayton Superior; Res X Cure WB.
Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Kurez W VOX;
TAMMSCURE WB 30C.
Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 420.
Lambert Corporation; AQUA KURE - CLEAR.
L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R.
Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100-CLEAR.
Nox-Crete Products Group; Resin Cure E.
Right Pointe; Clear Water Resin.
SpecChem, LLC; Spec Rez Clear.
Symons by Dayton Superior; Resi-Chem Clear.
TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2519 DC WB.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 6
q.
F.
Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,
nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of
floor covering.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
G.
Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Enviocure 100.
Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Clear Cure WB.
BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure-N-Seal WB.
ChemMasters; Safe-Cure & Seal 20.
Conspec by Dayton Superior; Cure and Seal WB.
Cresset Chemical Company; Crete-Trete 309-VOC Cure & Seal.
Dayton Superior Corporation; Safe Cure and Seal (J-18).
Edoco by Dayton Superior; Spartan Cote WB II.
Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Aqua Cure VOX;
Clearseal WB 150.
Kaufman Products, Inc.; Cure & Seal 309 Emulsion.
Lambert Corporation; Glazecote Sealer-20.
L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Dress & Seal WB.
Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Vocomp-20.
Metalcrete Industries; Metcure.
Nox-Crete Products Group; Cure & Seal 150E.
Symons by Dayton Superior; Cure & Seal 18 Percent E.
TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2519 WB.
Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Starseal 309.
Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, 18
to 25 percent solids, nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere
with bonding of floor covering.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure-N-Seal W.
ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear.
Conspec by Dayton Superior; High Seal.
Dayton Superior Corporation; Safe Cure and Seal (J-19).
Edoco by Dayton Superior; Spartan Cote WB II 20 Percent.
Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Diamond Clear VOX;
Clearseal WB STD.
Kaufman Products, Inc.; SureCure Emulsion.
Lambert Corporation; Glazecote Sealer-20.
L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Dress & Seal WB.
Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Vocomp-20.
Metalcrete Industries; Metcure 0800.
Nox-Crete Products Group; Cure & Seal 200E.
Symons by Dayton Superior; Cure & Seal 18 Percent E.
Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Starseal 0800.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 7
H.
Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315,
Type 1, Class A.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
2.
I.
BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure-N-Seal 25 LV.
ChemMasters; Spray-Cure & Seal Plus.
Conspec by Dayton Superior; Sealcure 1315.
Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Cure and Seal (J-22UV).
Edoco by Dayton Superior; Cureseal 1315.
Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Super Diamond Clear;
LusterSeal 300.
Kaufman Products, Inc.; Sure Cure 25.
Lambert Corporation; UV Super Seal.
L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Lumiseal Plus.
Meadows, W. R., Inc.; CS-309/30.
Metalcrete Industries; Seal N Kure 30.
Right Pointe; Right Sheen 30.
Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex AC 1315.
VOC Content: Curing and sealing compounds shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound:
Type 1, Class A.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
2.
ASTM C 1315,
BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure 1315.
ChemMasters; Polyseal WB.
Conspec by Dayton Superior; Sealcure 1315 WB.
Edoco by Dayton Superior; Cureseal 1315 WB.
Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Super Diamond Clear VOX;
LusterSeal WB 300.
Kaufman Products, Inc.; Sure Cure 25 Emulsion.
Lambert Corporation; UV Safe Seal.
L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Lumiseal WB Plus.
Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Vocomp-30.
Metalcrete Industries; Metcure 30.
Right Pointe; Right Sheen WB30.
Symons by Dayton Superior; Cure & Seal 31 Percent E.
Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Vexcon Starseal 1315.
VOC Content: Curing and sealing compounds shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 8
2.9
RELATED MATERIALS
A.
Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber
or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.
B.
Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or
styrene butadiene.
C.
Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing
and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit
requirements, and as follows:
1.
2.10
A.
REPAIR MATERIALS
Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be
applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match
adjacent floor elevations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.
3.
4.
A.
Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic
cement as defined in ASTM C 219.
Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions,
and application.
Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as
recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
Compressive Strength: Not less than 4000 psi (28 MPa) at 28 days when tested
according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.
Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be
applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) and that can be filled in over a scarified surface
to match adjacent floor elevations.
1.
2.11
Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to
hardened concrete.
Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic
cement as defined in ASTM C 219.
Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and
application.
Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as
recommended by topping manufacturer.
Compressive Strength: Not less than 4000 psi (28 MPa) at 28 days when tested
according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.
CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL
Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of
laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 9
1.
B.
Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture
designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.
Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than
portland cement in concrete as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Fly Ash: 25 percent.
Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent.
Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 25 percent.
Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 25 percent.
Silica Fume: 10 percent.
Combined Fly Ash, Pozzolans, and Silica Fume: 25 percent.
Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolans, Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag, and Silica
Fume: 50 percent with fly ash or pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not
exceeding 10 percent.
C.
Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.30 percent by weight of
cement.
D.
Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
2.12
A.
CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS
Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1.
2.
3.
2.13
A.
2.14
A.
Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as
required, for placement and workability.
Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low
humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa).
Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.55.
Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to
100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture,
plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
CONCRETE MIXING
Ready-Mixed Concrete:
Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.
1.
When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and
delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32
deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 10
B.
Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer.
1.
2.
3.
For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2
minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of
batch is released.
For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m), increase mixing time by 15 seconds
for each additional 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m).
Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project
identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixture time, quantity, and amount
of water added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FORMWORK
A.
Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,
lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure
can support such loads.
B.
Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C.
Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:
1.
Class B, 1/4 inch (6 mm) for rough-formed finished surfaces.
D.
Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
E.
Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.
Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide
top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.
1.
2.
Install keyways, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
F.
Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required
elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed
strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
G.
Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork
is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to
prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous
locations.
H.
Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
I.
Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in
the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 11
J.
Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and
other debris just before placing concrete.
K.
Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and
maintain proper alignment.
L.
Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, before placing reinforcement.
3.2
EMBEDDED ITEMS
A.
Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that
is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
1.
3.3
Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with
tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
Bridges."
REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A.
General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does
not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50
deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be
damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations need to be
maintained.
1.
2.
Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports
weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 75 percent of its 28-day
design compressive strength.
Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without
loosening or disturbing shores.
B.
Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or
otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply
new form-release agent.
C.
When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.
Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete
surfaces unless approved by Architect.
3.4
SHORES AND RESHORES
A.
Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of
shoring and reshoring.
1.
Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 12
B.
3.5
Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and
provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.
VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to
ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
3.6
Lap joints 12 inches (300 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
1.
Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete.
B.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that
would reduce bond to concrete.
C.
Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and
support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack
weld crossing reinforcing bars.
1.
If indicated to be welded, weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M.
D.
Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
E.
Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to
minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset
laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with
wire.
3.7
JOINTS
A.
General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B.
Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at
locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across
construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through
sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.
Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete.
Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset
joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder
intersection.
Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and
girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 13
5.
C.
Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Ground: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning
concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least onefourth of concrete thickness as follows:
1.
2.
D.
Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing
each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints
after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete
when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before
concrete develops random contraction cracks.
Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Ground: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab
junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and
other locations, as indicated.
1.
2.
3.
3.8
Use a bonding agent or epoxy-binding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is
placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished
concrete surface unless otherwise indicated.
Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch
(25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 07
Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated.
Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is
required, lace or clip sections together.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded
items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B.
Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless
approved by Architect.
C.
Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to
limitations of ACI 301.
1.
D.
Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to
mixture.
Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new
concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of
weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated.
Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
1.
2.
Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures
and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 14
3.
E.
Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of
construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F.
2.
3.
When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C)
for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the
temperature range required by ACI 301.
Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete
on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.
Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:
1.
2.
3.9
Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked
around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured
surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb
slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.
Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from
physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low
temperatures.
1.
G.
Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6
inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of
concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration
to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and
other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.
Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled
mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water
equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to
cool concrete is Contractor's option.
Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A.
Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes
and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified
limits on formed-surface irregularities.
1.
B.
Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 15
formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent
unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
3.10
FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A.
General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and
finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B.
Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bullfloated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4
inch (6 mm) in one direction.
1.
C.
Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small
or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.
Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular
texture.
1.
D.
E.
Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish and to be covered with fluid-applied
or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.
Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by
hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of
trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that
would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
1.
Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring,
carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-filmfinish coating system.
2.
Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an
unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- (3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on two high spots and
placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 3/16 inch (4.8 mm).
Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry
tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is still plastic,
slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.
1.
F.
Apply scratch finish to surfaces to receive concrete floor toppings and mortar setting
beds.
Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.
Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete floors, platforms, steps, ramps, and
elsewhere as indicated.
1.
Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with
fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish
with Architect before application.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 16
3.11
MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A.
Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in
place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with inplace construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to
complete the Work.
B.
Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still
green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and
terminations slightly rounded.
C.
Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as
shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations,
complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.
3.12
CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A.
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hotweather protection during curing.
B.
Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or
windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and
during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after
placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C.
Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported
slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after
loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the
remainder of the curing period.
D.
Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed
surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.
E.
Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:
1.
Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Water.
Continuous water-fog spray.
Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining
cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped
at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less
than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover
material and waterproof tape.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 17
a.
b.
c.
3.
Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall
within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair
damage during curing period.
a.
3.13
A.
Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Use for floors as indicated in architectural drawings.
Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
2.
3.
A.
3.15
A.
Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and
complete surface repairs.
Do not apply to concrete that is less than 28 days old.
Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet;
and repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until
surface is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous.
JOINT FILLING
Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
B.
Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without
damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound
manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere
with bonding of floor covering used on Project.
LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS
1.
3.14
Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive
floor coverings.
Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive
penetrating liquid floor treatments.
Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining
cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with
bonding of floor covering used on Project.
Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month. Do not fill joints until
construction traffic has permanently ceased.
Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact
faces of joint clean and dry.
CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove
and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 18
B.
Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two
and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water
for handling and placing.
C.
Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,
spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and
stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than
1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch (19
mm). Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water,
and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching
mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone
plugs secured in place with bonding agent.
Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and
standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding
color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match
before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher
than surrounding surface.
Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and
structural performance as determined by Architect.
Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and
verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces
sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,
honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or
that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of
width, and other objectionable conditions.
After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing
operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired
areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment.
Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's
written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather
edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low
areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent
floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to
manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level
surface.
Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in
diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with
clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch (19-mm)
clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and
apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original
concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with
adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 19
7.
Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching
mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt,
and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place
patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to
match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
E.
Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and
patching mortar.
F.
Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's
approval.
3.16
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing and Inspecting: Contractor will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to
perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B.
Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to
ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1.
2.
Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete
mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for
each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof.
Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. (76 cu. m)
or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample,
but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform
additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.
Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is
40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test
for each composite sample.
Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test
for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete
mixture.
Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.
a.
b.
7.
When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests
for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly
selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each
composite sample.
Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite
sample.
Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured
specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 20
a.
b.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
C.
3.17
A.
Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens
at 28 days.
A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of
two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.
When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratorycured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures
for protecting and curing in-place concrete.
Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three
consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength
and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by
more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).
Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and
Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain
Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete
testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive
strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking
strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.
Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may
be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of
concrete.
Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete
when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other
requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency
may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with
ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply
with the Contract Documents.
Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness within 48 hours of finishing.
PROTECTION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS
Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction
period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in
writing by liquid floor treatments installer.
END OF SECTION 033000
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 21
SECTION 042200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Concrete masonry units.
Mortar and grout.
Steel reinforcing bars.
Masonry joint reinforcement.
Ties and anchors.
Miscellaneous masonry accessories.
DEFINITIONS
A.
CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).
B.
Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths at 28
days.
1.
1.5
Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry from average net-area compressive
strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to Tables 1
and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For the following:
1.
Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars.
Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement."
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
042200 - 1
1.6
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:
1.
Masonry units.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
2.
1.7
Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer.
Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
Reinforcing bars.
Joint reinforcement.
Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.
Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of
ingredients.
1.
C.
Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.
For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculations
establishing average net-area compressive strength of units.
Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test
according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water
retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content.
Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with
compressive strength requirement.
Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and
equipment to be used to comply with requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, from
single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for
each aggregate.
B.
Masonry Standard:
Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by
requirements in the Contract Documents.
C.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an
enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If
units become wet, do not install until they are dry.
B.
Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not
use cementitious materials that have become damp.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
042200 - 2
C.
Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
D.
Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with
dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms,
under cover, and in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.
E.
Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt
and oil.
1.9
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when
construction is not in progress.
1.
Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides of walls and hold cover
securely in place.
B.
Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least
three days after building masonry walls or columns.
C.
Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left
exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such
masonry.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost
or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
1.
E.
Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading
coverings on ground and over wall surface.
Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and
integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from
splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.
Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40
deg F (4 deg C) and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7
days after completing cleaning.
Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
042200 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL
A.
2.2
Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to
contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units
where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A.
Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed
faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
B.
CMUs: ASTM C 90.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive
strength of 1900 psi (13.1 MPa).
Density Classification: Normal weight.
Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions.
Faces to Receive Plaster: Where units are indicated to receive a direct application of
plaster, provide textured-face units made with gap-graded aggregates.
Concrete Building Brick: ASTM C 55.
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, headers, bonding, and other special
conditions.
Provide square-edged units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated.
Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive
strength of 2500 psi (17.24 MPa).
Density Classification: Normal weight.
Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches (92 mm) wide by 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) high by
7-5/8 inches (194 mm) long.
CONCRETE AND MASONRY LINTELS
A.
General: Provide one of the following:
B.
Concrete Lintels: Formed-in-place concrete lintels complying with requirements in Division 03
Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete," and with reinforcing bars indicated.
2.4
MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II.
required to produce mortar color indicated.
B.
Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
Provide natural color or white cement as
042200 - 4
C.
Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing
no other ingredients.
D.
Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
1.
For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or
crushed stone.
E.
Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
F.
Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with
ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar
of composition indicated.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
G.
2.5
Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80.
Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morset.
Sonneborn Products, BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Trimix-NCA.
Water: Potable.
REINFORCEMENT
A.
Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420).
B.
Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
2.6
Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel.
Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) diameter.
Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) diameter.
Spacing of Cross Rods: Not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c.
Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units.
Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Ladder type with single pair of side rods.
TIES AND ANCHORS
A.
Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that
comply with the following unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Hot-Dip
Galvanized,
Carbon-Steel
Wire:
ASTM A 82/A 82M;
with
ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating.
2.
Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel,
with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.
3.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
042200 - 5
2.7
MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS
A.
Anchor Bolts: Headed or L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A
(ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where
indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of
dimensions indicated.
B.
Postinstalled Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors, as indicated.
2.8
MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A.
Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry
unit cells and hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch (3.77mm) steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars
indicated.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.9
Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 810, D/A 812 or
D/A 817.
Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 376 Rebar Positioner.
Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; #RB or #RB-Twin Rebar Positioner.
Wire-Bond; O-Ring or Double O-Ring Rebar Positioner.
MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A.
General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,
retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated.
Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to
view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.
B.
Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix.
Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients
before delivering to Project site.
C.
Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. Provide the
following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to
provide required compressive strength of masonry.
1.
D.
Type M or Type S.
Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
042200 - 6
1.
2.
3.
Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will
comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces
and pour height.
Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day
compressive strength indicated.
Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (203 to 279 mm) as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1.
2.
3.
For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental
to performance of work.
Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.
Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.
B.
Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify
actual locations of piping connections.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Build chases to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.
B.
Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing
equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.
C.
Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous
pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp,
unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install
cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
3.3
TOLERANCES
A.
Dimensions and Locations of Elements:
1.
2.
3.
For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch (12
mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or
minus 1/2 inch (12 mm).
For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or
minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) in a story height or 1/2 inch (12 mm) total.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
042200 - 7
B.
Lines and Levels:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Joints:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.4
For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4
inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary
from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6
m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6
mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and
expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3
mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in
3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4
inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch
(3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm).
For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more
than 1/8 inch (3 mm).
For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8
inch (9 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus
1/8 inch (3 mm).
LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A.
Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.
Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at
other locations.
B.
Lay masonry with all units in running bond. Bond and interlock each course at corners. Do not
use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or
jambs.
C.
Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in
course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive
mortar before laying fresh masonry.
D.
Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections.
Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
E.
Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of
metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
042200 - 8
G.
3.5
Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels,
posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.
MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A.
Lay hollow CMUs as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints.
With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.
With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on
footings.
With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on
footings where cells are not grouted.
B.
Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint
thickness unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than
paint) unless otherwise indicated.
3.6
MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A.
General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8
inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a
minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).
1.
2.
Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.
Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall openings
and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings in addition to continuous
reinforcement.
B.
Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.
D.
Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
3.7
LINTELS
A.
Provide concrete lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches (305 mm) are
shown without structural supporting lintels.
B.
Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.
3.8
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
A.
Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support
reinforced masonry elements during construction.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
042200 - 9
1.
2.
Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as
indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace,
tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of
reinforced masonry.
Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened
sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during
construction.
B.
Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
C.
Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough
strength to resist grout pressure.
1.
2.
3.9
Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout
placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches (1520 mm).
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing and Inspecting: Contractor will engage special inspectors and testing laboratory to
perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors and technicians access to
scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials
that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.
B.
Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for
compressive strength.
C.
Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test
mortar for compressive strength.
D.
Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.
3.10
REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A.
Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise
damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install
in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B.
Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and
completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent
construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application,
where indicated.
C.
In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove
mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
D.
Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
1.
Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes
or chisels.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
042200 - 10
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.11
A.
Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for
comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding
with cleaning of masonry.
Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering
them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking
tape.
Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by
rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to
type of stain on exposed surfaces.
MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's
property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.
END OF SECTION 042200
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
042200 - 11
SECTION 044303 – MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Related Documents: General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract,
Division 1 General Requirements, and Drawings are applicable to this Section.
B.
Section Includes:
1.
Simulated stone veneers for exterior applications.
2.
Reinforcement, anchorages, mortar, and accessories.
C.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 042200 – Unit Masonry: Masonry backup
2.
Section 079200 – Joint Sealants: Sealant joints
3.
Section 092200 – Portland Cement Plaster: Cement plaster finish
4.
Section 071620 - Crystalline Waterproofing
D.
Alternates: Work of this Section is affected by Alternates. Refer to Section 01230.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
1.4
Submit following in accordance with Section 01330.
1.
Product Data: Submit for fabricated wire reinforcement and each type of
stone specified. Include all applicable physical and performance data.
2.
Samples: Submit 1 3 feet x 4 feet samples of simulated stone units to
illustrate color, texture, and size range of each type unit.
3.
Manufacturer’s detailed installation instructions.
4.
List of projects on which manufacturer has supplied simulated stone materials
in the past 5 years.
5.
Certifications listed in Quality Assurance article of Part 1 this Section.
FIELD SAMPLES
A.
General: Comply with Section 014000.
B.
Sample Installation: Construct stone wall at job site 3 feet x 4 feet in size, including
mortar, special shapes, bonding, joint work, reinforcement, moisture barrier,
grouting, corbelling, mortar color, expansion, control joints, and accessories.
1.
Obtain Architect’s approval before beginning work. Protect and retain sample
as a basis on which the quality of the work will be judged. Do not remove
until Substantial Completion.
2.
Accepted Field Sample: May not remain as part of completed Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer: Minimum 5 years experience in similar types of work of similar scope and
be able to furnish list of previous jobs and references if requested by Architect.
B.
Fabricator: Licensee of manufacturer with not less than 5 years experience
MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER
044303 - 1
manufacturing simulated stone products of size, type, and quantity as required for
this project.
1.5
C.
Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints as indicated on Drawings or, if not
indicated, install at frequency and in accordance with details and as recommended
by manufacturer. Confirm locations and frequency with Architect before beginning
work.
D.
Certifications:
1.
Provide written documentation that products have met or exceeded at least
one of the following certifications for a minimum of 10 years:
a.
ICBO – International Conference of Building Officials;
b.
SBCCI – Southern Building Code Congress International;
c.
BOCA – Building Officials and Code Administrators International; or
d.
ICC-International Code Council.
2.
Provide written documentation that stone products comply with specified
minimum criteria when tested in accordance with testing standards specified
in Part 2 of this Section.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.7
Environmental Requirements:
1.
Minimum air temperature of 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) prior to, during, and
for 48 hours after completion of work; and
2.
Cold Weather Requirements: IMIAC (International Masonry Industry AllWeather Council) - Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for
Cold Weather Masonry Construction.
Deliver, store, handle, and protect materials in accordance with Section 01600.
1.
Store mortar materials on pallets in dry place.
2.
Protect reinforcement and accessories from elements.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Prepare and submit in accordance with Section 01780.
1.
Provide 40-year warranty against manufacturing defects in manufactured
stone products.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Basis of Design: Coronado Stone Products.
B.
Stone Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following
product:
1.
Coronado Product: Caribbean Coral as manufactured by Coronado Stone
Products
a.
Stone Color: Barbados as manufactured by Coronado Stone Products
MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER
044303 - 2
2.2
2.3
STONE MATERIALS
A.
Simulated Stone:
1.
Precast simulated stone, composed of following materials:
a.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1, 2, or 3 depending upon color
to be produced.
b.
Course Aggregates: ASTM C 330, lightweight type, color as necessary
to obtain final approved color of stone.
c.
Sand: ASTM C 144, special color if required to match approved
sample.
d.
Iron oxide colors.
e.
Water: Clean and free from deleterious substances.
B.
Stone Accessories
1.
Provide the following accessory and accent stones:
a.
Chiseled Stone Sill Caps in Chablis color in 2.5 inch H x 24 inch L.
MORTAR MATERIALS
A.
Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or masonry cement meeting ASTM C 91.
B.
Masonry sand, complying with ASTM C 144, natural or manufactured.
C.
Pigments: Meeting ASTM C 979, mineral oxide type. Do not exceed color
manufacturer’s limitations.
1. Mortar Color: Natural
D.
Bonding Agent: As recommended by simulated stone manufacturer for direct
bonding of simulated stone to masonry or concrete substrates when not using metal
lath.
E.
Water: Potable.
F.
Mixing: Use thinset with acrylic additive in accordance with thinset manufacturer’s
recommendation.
1.
Thoroughly mix mortar and grout ingredients in quantities needed for
immediate use. Mix grout to ASTM C 270, Type S proportions and mortar to
ASTM C 270, Type S requirements.
2.
Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower freezing point of mortar.
3.
Provide admixture necessary to assure adhesion to crystalline waterproofing
substrate.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A.
Examination: Examine conditions and proceed with work in accordance with
Section 014000.
1.
Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER
044303 - 3
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.2
Verify items provided by other Sections of work are properly sized and
located.
Verify that built-in items are in proper location and ready for roughing into
masonry work.
Verify correct product prior to installation.
Verify that masonry and concrete substrates do not have residual coatings
(paint, bond breaker, curing compounds, etc.) present, which may affect
bonding of mortar to substrate.
a.
Install metal lath if residual coatings are present on substrate.
Consult Owner and manufacturer if deficiencies exist. Correct deficiencies in
accordance with stone manufacturer’s recommendations.
B.
Protect surrounding area from possible damage during installation work.
C.
Initiating installation constitutes Installer’s acceptance of existing surfaces and
substrate.
APPLICATION
A.
Mortar:
1.
Apply bonding agent to masonry or concrete substrates in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations.
2.
Apply mortar-thinset adhesive mixture to the back of the stone.
B.
Simulated Stone Veneer: Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
1.
Caribbean Coral: Blend the stone on the wall from several different boxes, to
ensure a proper blend of color variation.
2.
Apply 3/8 to 1/2 inch of mortar covering to back of each stone.
3.
Place units with uniform mortar joints Full Smooth Tooled in accordance
with manufacturer’s instructions.
4.
Install outside corner return units with short and long lengths alternated.
5.
Install accessory pieces (quoins, caps, sills, moldings) as work progresses,
using same techniques as units in field of wall.
C.
Plan work to minimize jobsite cutting. Perform necessary cutting with proper tools
to provide uniform edges; take care to prevent breaking unit corners or edges.
D.
Remove excess mortar; do not allow mortar to dry on face of units.
1.
Point and tool joints before mortar has set.
2.
Clean and finish joints in accordance with architect’s and manufacturer’s
instructions.
E.
Control Joints: Size in accordance with Section 07920 for sealant performance, but
in no case larger than adjacent mortar joints in exposed stone units.
F.
Expansion Joints: Provide where indicated on Drawings or as recommended by
system manufacturer.
G.
Built-in Work: As work progresses, build in door and window frames, nailing strips,
anchor bolts, plates, and other items specified in various sections.
1.
Build in items plumb and level.
MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER
044303 - 4
2.
3.
3.3
ADJUSTING
A.
3.4
Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in mortar joints. Fill frame
voids solid with mortar.
Do not build in organic materials subject to deterioration.
Cutting and Fitting: Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves, and grounds.
Cooperate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location.
1.
Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting any area not indicated or where
appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired.
CLEANING AND SEALING
A.
Cleaning: Comply with Section 017000.
1.
Remove excess mortar and smears using brush or steel wool.
2.
Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.
3.
Clean soiled surfaces with non-acidic solution, acceptable to the stone
manufacturer, which will not harm masonry or adjacent materials.
4.
Leave surfaces thoroughly clean and free of mortar and other soiling.
5.
Use nonmetallic tools in cleaning operations.
B.
Sealer: Apply sealer to completed surface in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
END OF SECTION
MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER
044303 - 5
SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.3
Structural steel.
Grout.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC 303, "Code of
Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.
Include embedment drawings.
Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,
and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed
and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.
Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.
Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections.
Identify members and connections of the seismic-load-resisting system.
Indicate locations and dimensions of protected zones.
Identify demand critical welds.
Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs):
Provide according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for each welded
joint whether prequalified or qualified by testing, including the following:
1.
2.
Power source (constant current or constant voltage).
Electrode manufacturer and trade name, for demand critical welds.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051200 - 1
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and fabricator.
B.
Welding certificates.
C.
Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers,
certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
D.
Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.
E.
Product Test Reports: For the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
1.6
Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis.
Shear stud connectors.
Shop primers.
Nonshrink grout.
Source quality-control reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality
Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD.
B.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
C.
Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:
1.
2.
3.
D.
1.7
AISC 303.
AISC 360.
RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off
ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel
members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.
1.
B.
Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or
overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or
structures as directed.
Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.
1.
Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes
repackaging and seals containers.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051200 - 2
2.
1.8
Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint
and coating manufacturers' recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are
compatible with one another.
B.
Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction
without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and
directions for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS
A.
W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.
B.
Channels, Angles: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C.
Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
D.
Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing.
E.
Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.
2.2
BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS
A.
High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy-hex
steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S) heavy-hex carbonsteel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with
plain finish.
B.
Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished
carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.
C.
Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 or ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Configuration: Straight.
Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex carbon steel.
Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.
Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel.
Finish: Plain.
Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, straight.
1.
2.
Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex carbon steel.
Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051200 - 3
3.
4.
E.
Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel.
Finish:
Plain or where indicated to be galvanized hot-dip zinc coating,
ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.
Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex carbon steel.
Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel.
Finish:
Plain or where indicated to be galvanized hot-dip zinc coating,
ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.
PRIMER
A.
Primer: SSPC-Paint 25, Type I or Type II, zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer.
B.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: MPI#18, MPI#19, or SSPC-Paint 20.
2.4
GROUT
A.
2.5
Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout:
ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic
aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for
application and a 30-minute working time.
FABRICATION
A.
Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate
according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and
AISC 360.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Camber structural-steel members where indicated.
Fabricate beams with rolling camber up.
Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.
Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shoppriming operations.
Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.
1.
Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in
AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
C.
Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.
D.
Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.
E.
Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPCSP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051200 - 4
2.6
SHOP CONNECTIONS
A.
High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint
specified.
1.
B.
2.7
Joint Type: Snug tightened.
Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding
procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.
SHOP PRIMING
A.
Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's
written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness
of 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners,
edges, and exposed surfaces.
1.
2.
2.8
Extend priming of partially embedded
Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and
spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and
standards:
1.
C.
Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar.
members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm).
Surfaces to be field welded.
Galvanized surfaces.
Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection.
Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.
GALVANIZING
A.
Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: where indicated to be galvanized, apply zinc coating by the hotdip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.
1.
2.9
Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work unless they will
function as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the
Contract Documents.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051200 - 5
B.
Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections may be inspected according to RCSC's
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
C.
Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections may be tested
and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at
testing agency's option:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished
weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.
Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded shear connectors may be tested and inspected
according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:
1.
2.
Bend tests will be performed if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous
360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.
Tests will be conducted on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear
connectors already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and
locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with
requirements.
1.
B.
3.2
Prepare a certified survey of bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other
embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural
steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in
intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel,
connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.
ERECTION
A.
Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to
AISC 303 and AISC 360.
B.
Base Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and
roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051200 - 6
1.
2.
3.
4.
Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.
Weld plate washers to top of baseplate.
Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.
Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before
packing with grout.
Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain.
Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with
manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.
C.
Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for
Steel Buildings and Bridges."
D.
Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before
permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be
in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for
discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
1.
2.
Level and plumb individual members of structure.
Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean
temperature when structure is completed and in service.
E.
Splice members only where indicated.
F.
Do not use thermal cutting during erection.
G.
Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be
enlarged to admit bolts.
3.4
FIELD CONNECTIONS
A.
High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint
specified.
1.
B.
Joint Type: Snug tightened.
Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding
procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.
1.
2.
3.
Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary
connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
Remove backing bars or runoff tabs where indicated, back gouge, and grind steel smooth.
Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of
axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel
Buildings and Bridges" for mill material.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051200 - 7
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency
to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections.
B.
Bolted Connections: Bolted connections may be inspected according to RCSC's "Specification
for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
C.
Welded Connections: Field welds may be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
1.
In addition to visual inspection, field welds may be tested and inspected according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:
a.
b.
c.
d.
D.
3.6
Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on
finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be
accepted.
Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the
Contract Documents.
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
B.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or
missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1
for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1.
C.
Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool
cleaning.
Touchup Painting:
Sections.
Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Division 09 painting
END OF SECTION 051200
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051200 - 8
SECTION 052100 - STEEL JOIST FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
K-series steel joists.
Joist accessories.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.3
SJI's "Specifications": Steel Joist Institute's "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight
Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders."
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
1.4
Include layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacing of joists.
Include joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, and joist accessories; splice and
connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction.
Indicate locations and details of bearing plates to be embedded in other construction.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For manufacturer and professional engineer.
B.
Welding certificates.
C.
Manufacturer certificates.
D.
Mill Certificates: For each type of bolt.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying
with applicable standard specifications and load tables in SJI's "Specifications."
1.
Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services for
designing special joists to comply with performance requirements.
STEEL JOIST FRAMING
052100 - 1
B.
1.6
Welding Qualifications: Qualify field-welding procedures and personnel according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications."
B.
Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and
handling.
1.7
SEQUENCING
A.
Deliver steel bearing plates to be built into cast-in-place concrete and masonry construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Structural Performance: Provide special joists and connections capable of withstanding design
loads indicated.
1.
Design special joists to withstand design loads with live-load deflections no greater than
the following:
a.
2.2
Roof Joists: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span.
K-SERIES STEEL JOISTS
A.
Manufacture steel joists of type indicated according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web
Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord
members, underslung ends, and parallel top chord.
1.
Joist Type: K-series steel joists.
B.
Top-Chord Extensions: Extend top chords of joists with SJI's Type S top-chord extensions
where indicated, complying with SJI's "Specifications."
C.
Extended Ends: Extend bearing ends of joists with SJI's Type R extended ends where indicated,
complying with SJI's "Specifications."
D.
Do not camber joists.
E.
Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist
slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches (1:48).
STEEL JOIST FRAMING
052100 - 2
2.3
PRIMERS
A.
2.4
Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with performance
requirements in SSPC-Paint 15.
JOIST ACCESSORIES
A.
Bridging: Schematically indicated. Detail and fabricate according to SJI's "Specifications."
Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability.
B.
Fabricate steel bearing plates from ASTM A 36/A 36M steel with integral anchorages of sizes
and thicknesses indicated. Shop prime paint.
C.
Furnish ceiling extensions, if indicated in drawings, either extended bottom-chord elements or a
separate extension unit of enough strength to support ceiling construction. Extend ends to
within 1/2 inch (13 mm) of finished wall surface unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Carbon-Steel Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property
Class 4.6), carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and threaded fasteners; carbon-steel nuts; and flat,
unhardened steel washers.
1.
Finish: Plain, uncoated.
E.
Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
F.
Furnish miscellaneous accessories including splice plates and bolts required by joist
manufacturer to complete joist assembly.
2.5
CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING
A.
Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and
accessories by power-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3.
B.
Apply one coat of shop primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a
continuous, dry paint film not less than 1 mil (0.025 mm) thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural framing for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
STEEL JOIST FRAMING
052100 - 3
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured.
B.
Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting
construction according to SJI's "Specifications," joist manufacturer's written recommendations,
and requirements in this Section.
1.
2.
3.
Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening.
Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that
joists are stabilized during construction.
Delay rigidly connecting bottom-chord extensions to columns or supports until dead
loads are applied.
C.
Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates and framework. Coordinate welding
sequence and procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and
procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting
welding work.
D.
Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are
applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or
beams.
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency
to inspect field welds and to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test and inspection
reports.
B.
Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
1.
In addition to visual inspection, field welds may be subject to testing according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following procedures, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709.
Ultrasonic Testing: ASTM E 164.
Radiographic Testing: ASTM E 94.
C.
Correct deficiencies in Work that test and inspection reports have indicated are not in
compliance with specified requirements.
D.
Perform additional testing to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified
requirements.
3.4
PROTECTION
A.
Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field
connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists, bearing plates, abutting
structural steel, and accessories.
STEEL JOIST FRAMING
052100 - 4
1.
2.
B.
Clean and prepare surfaces by hand-tool cleaning according to SSPC-SP 2, or power-tool
cleaning according to SSPC-SP 3.
Apply a compatible primer of same type as primer used on adjacent surfaces.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure that joists and accessories are without damage or deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 052100
STEEL JOIST FRAMING
052100 - 5
SECTION 053100 - STEEL DECKING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.3
Roof deck.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
1.4
Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans,
cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Welding certificates.
B.
Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck.
C.
Evaluation Reports: For steel deck.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural
Welding Code - Sheet Steel.”
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and
handling.
B.
Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage.
waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.
STEEL DECKING
Protect with a
053100 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
2.2
AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according
to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
Members."
ROOF DECK
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
B.
Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI
Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, and with the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
ASC Profiles, Inc.; a Blue Scope Steel company.
Canam United States; Canam Group Inc.
CMC Joist & Deck.
Consolidated Systems, Inc.; Metal Dek Group.
Cordeck.
DACS, Inc.
Epic Metals Corporation.
Marlyn Steel Decks, Inc.
New Millennium Building Systems, LLC.
Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Group.
Roof Deck, Inc.
Valley Joist; Subsidiary of EBSCO Industries, Inc.
Verco Manufacturing Co.
Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation.
Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 (230),
G60 (Z180), zinc coating.
Deck Profile: Type B, wide rib.
Profile Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).
Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated.
Side Laps: Overlapped or interlocking seam at Contractor's option.
ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with
requirements indicated.
B.
Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel
screws, No. 10 (4.8-mm) minimum diameter.
STEEL DECKING
053100 - 2
C.
Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000
psi (230 MPa), not less than 0.0359-inch (0.91-mm) design uncoated thickness, of same
material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.
D.
Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material,
finish, and thickness as deck unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or MIL-P-21035B, with dry film containing a
minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in
SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.
B.
Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.
C.
Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned
and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract
side-lap interlocks.
D.
Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.
E.
Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting
through or adjacent to deck.
F.
Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength,
continuity of deck, and support of other work.
G.
Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.
3.3
ROOF-DECK INSTALLATION
A.
Fasten roof-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface
diameter indicated, and as follows:
1.
2.
Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch (16 mm), nominal.
Weld Spacing: As indicated in drawings.
STEEL DECKING
053100 - 3
B.
Side-Lap Fastening: Fasten side laps of panels between supports, at intervals as indicated in the
drawings, and as follows:
1.
C.
End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2
inches (38 mm), with end joints as follows:
1.
D.
Install reinforcing channels or zees in ribs to span between supports and weld.
Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end
closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Weld
to substrate to provide a complete deck installation.
1.
3.4
End Joints: Lapped 2 inches (51 mm) minimum or butted at Contractor's option.
Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof deck and weld
flanges to top of deck. Space welds not more than 6 inches (152 mm) apart with at least one
weld at each corner.
1.
E.
Mechanically fasten with corrosion resistant, self-drilling, No. 10 (4.8-mm-) diameter or
larger, carbon-steel screws.
Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels unless otherwise indicated.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency:
inspections.
B.
Field welds will be subject to inspection.
C.
Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and
Architect.
D.
Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.
E.
Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of
corrected work with specified requirements.
3.5
Contractor will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and
PROTECTION
A.
Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck
with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 053100
STEEL DECKING
053100 - 4
SECTION 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
1.3
Ceiling joist framing.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal
framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.
Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing,
bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Welding certificates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency, or in-house
testing with calibrated test equipment indicating steel sheet complies with requirements,
including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical
requirements, ductility, and metallic-coating thickness.
B.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
C.
AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the
Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel
Framing - General Provisions."
D.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
054000 - 1
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during
delivery, storage, and handling.
B.
Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid
condensation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
cold-formed metal framing that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
2.2
Allied Studco.
AllSteel Products, Inc.
California Expanded Metal Products Company.
Clark Steel Framing.
Consolidated Fabricators Corp.; Building Products Division.
Craco Metals Manufacturing, LLC.
Custom Stud, Inc.
Dale/Incor.
Design Shapes in Steel.
Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company.
Formetal Co. Inc. (The).
Innovative Steel Systems.
MarinoWare; a division of Ware Industries.
Quail Run Building Materials, Inc.
SCAFCO Corporation.
Southeastern Stud & Components, Inc.
Steel Construction Systems.
Steeler, Inc.
Super Stud Building Products, Inc.
United Metal Products, Inc.
MATERIALS
A.
Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and
coating weight as follows:
1.
2.
B.
Grade: ST50H (ST340H).
Coating: G60 (Z180).
Steel Sheet for Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating
as follows:
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
054000 - 2
1.
2.
2.3
Grade: 50 (340), Class 1 or 2.
Coating: G90 (Z275).
CEILING JOIST FRAMING
A.
Steel Ceiling Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated,
unpunched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:
1.
2.
2.4
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.84 mm) or as otherwise indicated in the
drawings.
Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) or as otherwise indicated in the drawings.
FRAMING ACCESSORIES
A.
Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural
Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.
B.
Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise
indicated, as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.5
Supplementary framing.
Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking.
Web stiffeners.
Anchor clips.
End clips.
Gusset plates.
Hole reinforcing plates.
Backer plates.
ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS
A.
Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to
ASTM A 123/A 123M.
B.
Mechanical Fasteners:
steel drill screws.
1.
C.
2.6
ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping
Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.
Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Galvanizing Repair Paint ASTM A 780.
B.
Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, nonleaching.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
054000 - 3
2.7
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with
connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards,
manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.
1.
2.
3.
Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates.
Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch
fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not
permitted.
a.
b.
4.
Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and
quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw
penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.
Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw
fastening, according to Shop Drawings.
B.
Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection
stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.
C.
Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum
allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:
1.
2.
Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm)
from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements
of sheathing or other finishing materials.
Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-ofsquare tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
1.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field
assembled.
B.
Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel
Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent
requirements are indicated.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
054000 - 4
C.
Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting
structure.
D.
Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with
connections securely fastened.
1.
2.
Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as indicated
in the drawings.
a.
b.
Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and
quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and
complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.
E.
Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track
or tension members.
F.
Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support construction loads.
Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure
has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.
G.
Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard
punched openings.
H.
Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a
maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:
1.
3.3
Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from
plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of
sheathing or other finishing materials.
CEILING JOIST INSTALLATION
A.
Install joists bearing on supporting frame, level, straight, and plumb; adjust to final position,
brace, and reinforce. Fasten joists to both flanges of joist track.
1.
2.
Install joists over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38
mm).
Reinforce ends and bearing points of joists with web stiffeners, end clips, joist hangers,
steel clip angles, or steel-stud sections as indicated on Shop Drawings.
B.
Space joists: As indicated in the drawings.
C.
Frame openings with built-up joist headers consisting of joist and joist track, nesting joists, or
another combination of connected joists if indicated.
D.
Install joist reinforcement at interior supports with single, short length of joist section located
directly over interior support, with lapped joists of equal length to joist reinforcement, or as
indicated on Shop Drawings.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
054000 - 5
1.
E.
Install bridging at intervals indicated on Shop Drawings.
intersection as follows:
1.
F.
3.4
Install web stiffeners to transfer axial loads of walls above.
Fasten bridging at each joist
Bridging: Joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated, secured to joist
webs.
Install miscellaneous joist framing and connections, including web stiffeners, closure pieces,
clip angles, continuous angles, hold-down angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete
and stable joist-framing assembly.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing: Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B.
Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.
C.
Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
D.
Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified
requirements.
E.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.5
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A.
Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and
installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and
manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time
of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 054000
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
054000 - 6
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.2
Miscellaneous steel framing and supports.
Shelf angles.
Miscellaneous steel trim.
Metal Ladders.
Metal Bollards.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.
1.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METALS, GENERAL
A.
2.2
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes.
FERROUS METALS
A.
Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel
products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not
less than 25 percent.
B.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C.
Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.
D.
Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.
E.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.
2.3
NONFERROUS METALS
A.
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 1
B.
Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6.
C.
Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.
D.
Bronze Extrusions: ASTM B 455, Alloy UNS No. C38500 (extruded architectural bronze).
E.
Bronze Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C83600 (leaded red brass) or No. C84400
(leaded semired brass).
F.
Nickel Silver Castings:
bronze).
2.4
ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C97600 (20 percent leaded nickel
FASTENERS
A.
General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use
and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941
(ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.
Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.
Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver.
Provide bronze fasteners for fastening bronze.
B.
Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise
indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or
ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip
galvanized per ASTM F 2329.
C.
Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.
1.
2.5
Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise
indicated.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.
B.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and
compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
C.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
D.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for
interior and exterior applications.
E.
Concrete: Provide where required normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa).
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 2
2.6
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections
that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
B.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove
sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
C.
Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.
D.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or
welds where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
E.
Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude
water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
F.
Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally
welded steel strap anchors not less than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.
2.7
MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A.
General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to
complete the Work.
B.
Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise
indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent
construction.
2.8
SHELF ANGLES
A.
Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete
framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch (19-mm) bolts, spaced not more
than 6 inches (150 mm) from ends and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
B.
For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and
concrete.
C.
Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls and in non-air conditioned spaces.
D.
Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-inplace concrete.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 3
2.9
MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
A.
Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown
with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed
field splices where possible.
B.
Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with
other work.
C.
Galvanize miscellaneous steel trim.
2.10
A.
METAL LADDERS
General:
1.
B.
Steel Ladders:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.11
A.
2.12
Space siderails 18 inches apart unless otherwise indicated.
Siderails: Continuous, 1/2-by-4-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges.
Rungs: 3/4-inch- diameter steel bars.
Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.
Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminumoxide granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled
with aluminum-oxide grout.
Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung by coating with abrasive material
metallically bonded to rung.
Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or
bolted steel brackets.
Galvanize ladders, including brackets and fasteners.
Prime ladders, including brackets and fasteners, with zinc-rich primer.
METAL BOLLARDS
Fabricate metal bollards from galvanized Schedule 40 steel pipe.
1.
B.
Comply with ANSI A14.3 unless otherwise indicated.
Fill bollards with 3000 psi concrete and finish top flush with top of pipe, smooth finish.
Prime bollards with zinc-rich primer.
FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 4
2.13
STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A.
Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize all steel items to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel
and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.
B.
Shop prime iron and steel items unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on
fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.
1.
C.
Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3,
"Commercial Blast Cleaning."
1.
2.
3.
D.
Shop prime with zinc-rich primer.
Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial
Blast Cleaning."
Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification
No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with
edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and
levels.
B.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.
D.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal
fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction.
E.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,
masonry, or similar construction.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 5
3.2
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
B.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780.
END OF SECTION 055000
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 6
SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes the following:
1.
Wood blocking and nailers.
2.
Wood sleepers.
3.
Plywood backing panels.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit
stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the
American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
B.
Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in
effect for Project:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Wood-preservative-treated wood.
Fire-retardant-treated wood.
Power-driven fasteners.
Powder-actuated fasteners.
Expansion anchors.
Metal framing anchors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A.
Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency
is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on
end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade
compliance issued by grading agency.
Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER
A.
Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 1
1.
Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
arsenic or chromium.
B.
Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
C.
Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board
of Review.
D.
Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1.
Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in
contact with masonry or concrete.
2.
Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior
masonry or concrete walls.
3.
Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches (460 mm) above the ground in
crawlspaces or unexcavated areas.
4.
Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.
2.3
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27
(plywood).
1.
2.
3.
Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated.
Use Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT) for enclosed roof framing, framing in attic
spaces, and where indicated.
Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1.
Concealed blocking.
2.
Plywood backing panels.
2.4
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A.
General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other
construction, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
Blocking.
Nailers.
Grounds.
B.
For items of dimension lumber size, provide Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber with 19
percent maximum moisture content of any species.
C.
For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any
of the following species and grades:
1.
Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 2
2.
2.5
Western woods, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.
PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A.
2.6
Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, AC, fire-retardant
treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal
thickness.
FASTENERS
A.
General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified.
1.
Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative
treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel.
B.
Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
C.
Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6);
with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other
construction.
B.
Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install
continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
C.
Framing Standard:
Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame
Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated
lumber.
F.
Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the following:
1.
2.
NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 3
3.2
PROTECTION
A.
Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite
protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.
Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
END OF SECTION 061000
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 4
SECTION 064100 - ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals: Shop Drawings.
B.
Fabricator Qualifications: Fabricator knowledgeable in AWI’s Quality Standards.
C.
Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
D.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet
work is completed, and HVAC system is operating.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
A.
Quality Standard: AWI, AWMAC, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."
B.
Plastic-Laminate Cabinets: Premium grade.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.2
Type of Construction: Frameless.
Cabinet and Door and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay.
Laminate Cladding: Horizontal surfaces other than tops, Grade HGS; vertical surfaces,
Grade HGS; edges, Grade HGS; semiexposed surfaces, Grade VGS.
Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid hardwood.
Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.
MATERIALS
A.
Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.
B.
Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no urea
formaldehyde. Acceptable for use on cabinet doors only.
C.
Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood):
containing no urea formaldehyde.
D.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3.
1.
HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive
Manufacturers: One of the following:
a.
Formica Corporation.
b.
Panolam Industries
c.
Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
064100 - 1
E.
2.3
Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with
ISSFA-2.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Formica Corporation.
b.
Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div.
c.
Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
d.
Corian.
CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type):
opening, self-closing.
B.
Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter.
C.
Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081 or
BHMA A156.9, B04102; with shelf brackets, B04112.
D.
Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal.
E.
Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of
Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100.
File Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-200.
Pencil Drawer Slides: Grade 2.
Keyboard Slides: Grade 1HD-100.
Trash Bin Slides: Grade 1HD-200.
F.
Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.
G.
Exposed Hardware Finishes: Comply with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA code number indicated.
1.
Finish: Satin Chrome: BHMA 626 or BHMA 652 or Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.
H.
Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to 15
percent moisture content.
I.
Adhesives, General: Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde.
1.
VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives: Installation adhesives hall have a VOC content
of 30 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.
Low-Emitting Materials: Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers."
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
064100 - 2
2.4
FABRICATION
A.
Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble
components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site,
provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
B.
Plastic-Laminate Cabinets:
1.
C.
AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Premium grade.
Solid-Surfacing-Material Countertops:
1.
2.
3.
Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: 1/2 inch.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As indicated by manufacturer's designations noted on the
drawings.
Fabricate tops in one piece with loose backsplashes for field application. Comply with
solid-surfacing-material manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers,
fabrication, and finishing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation
areas.
B.
Install cabinets to comply with referenced quality standard for grade specified.
C.
Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install
level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).
D.
Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at
cuts.
E.
Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Fasten with
countersunk concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws
for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush.
F.
Cabinets: Install so doors and drawers are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors
and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation.
1.
Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16
inches (400 mm) o.c. with toggle bolts through metal backing or metal framing behind
wall finish.
END OF SECTION 064100
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
064100 - 3
SECTION 071620 - CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
Crystalline waterproofing of concrete masonry surfaces.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. Concrete surfaces.
B.
Section 042200-Unit Masonry. Concrete masonry surfaces.
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM C 39/C 39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical
Concrete Specimens; 1999.
B.
ASTM C 267 - Standard Test Methods for Chemical Resistance of Mortars, Grouts, and
Monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concretes; 1997.
C.
ASTM E 329 - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection
of Materials Used in Construction; 1998a.
D.
COE CRD-C 48 - Standard Test Method for Water Permeability of Concrete; 1992.
E.
NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2000a.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1.
Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2.
Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3.
Installation methods.
C.
Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance
characteristics and physical properties.
1.
Testing Agency: Independent laboratory meeting the requirements of ASTM E 329
and certified by the United States Bureau of Standards.
D.
Certificates: Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that:
1.
Materials comply with specified performance characteristics and physical
requirements.
2.
Installer is qualified and approved by manufacturer.
E.
Manufacturer's report on field inspection of substrates, prior to installation.
F.
Close Out: Executed warranties.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING
071620-1
1.6
1.7
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: An ISO 9001 certified firm with not less than 25 years
experience manufacturing crystalline waterproofing of the type specified, able to provide test
reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics, and able to provide
on-site technical representation to advise on installation.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Experienced in work of the type specified in this section and approved
in writing by waterproofing manufacturer.
C.
Preinstallation Meeting: Prior to starting work, conduct a meeting with the waterproofing
installer, installers of adjacent work, and waterproofing manufacturer's representative to
verify project requirements, substrate conditions, manufacturer's installation instructions, and
manufacturer's warranty requirements; notify the Owner and Architect/Engineer at least one
week in advance of meeting.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with
identification labels intact.
B.
Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
C.
Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature
conditions recommended by manufacturer.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.8
Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard warranty document executed by
authorized company official; warranty period: ten (10) years commencing on Date of
Substantial Completion.
B.
Installer's Warranty: Provide warranty signed by installer as follows:
1.
Installer warrants that, upon completion of the work, surfaces treated with crystalline
waterproofing will remain free of water leakage resulting from defective workmanship
or materials for a period of 2 years from Date of Substantial Completion.
2.
In the event that water leakage occurs within the warranty period from such causes, the
installer shall, at his own expense, repair, replace, or otherwise correct such defective
workmanship and materials.
3.
Installer shall not be liable for consequential damages.
4.
Installer's liability shall be limited to repair, replacement, or correction of defective
workmanship and materials.
5.
This warranty excludes leaks or other defects due to causes beyond the installer's
control, including but not limited to structural failure, movement of the structure, fire,
earthquakes, tornadoes, and hurricanes.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING
071620-2
2.2
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1.
Xypex Chemical Corp.
2.
Tremco
3.
W.R. Meadows
B.
Obtain all crystalline waterproofing products from a single source.
C.
Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600.
MATERIALS
A.
Waterproofing Products: Provide installed products that comply with the following, when
tested using cured concrete samples made without admixtures, with two 0.05 inch (1 mm)
thick coats of waterproofing:
1.
Penetration: At least 12 inches (300 mm) penetration of crystal-forming material,
evidenced by scanning electron microscope photographs.
2.
Permeability: No measurable leakage through waterproofed concrete, when tested in
accordance with COE CRD-C 48 at 405 feet (123.4 m) of head or 175 PSI (1200 KPa)
using 2 inch (50 mm) thick, 2000 PSI (13.8 MPa) compressive strength concrete.
3.
Chemical Resistance:
No detrimental effects when tested using 4000 PSI (27.6
MPa) compressive strength concrete in accordance with ASTM C 267 using
hydrochloric acid (pH of 3.5), brake fluid, transformer oil, ethylene glycol, toluene, and
caustic soda as test mediums for duration of 84 days each; minimum of 14 percent
increase in concrete compressive strength when tested in accordance with ASTM C
39/C 39M.
4.
Potable Water Contact Approval: NSF certification for use on structures holding
potable water, based on testing in accordance with NSF 61.
B.
Waterproofing: Single coat crystalline waterproofing; compound of Portland cement, silica
sand and active chemicals, mixed with water in proportions recommended by manufacturer to
achieve full coverage with application method used.
C.
Dry Pack Repair Compound: Dry pack consistency mixture of Concentrate repair
compound; compound of Portland cement, silica sand and active chemicals; and water in
proportions recommended by manufacturer.
D.
Patching Compound: Single component, fast-setting, non-shrink, high bond strength
hydraulic cement; where needed for increased bond strength to existing concrete.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
C.
Obtain waterproofing manufacturer's approval of substrates; submit field inspection report.
D.
Do not install unless substrate and ambient air temperatures are within range acceptable to
waterproofing manufacturer.
PREPARATION OF CURED CONCRETE
CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING
071620-3
A.
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
Prepare surfaces to be treated in accordance with waterproofing manufacturer's instructions.
INSTALLATION ON CURED CONCRETE
A.
Comply with manufacturer's instructions, including product data, technical bulletins, catalog
installation instructions, and product carton instructions.
B.
Mix materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Wet concrete surfaces and saturate with clean water to ensure migration of crystalline
chemicals into concrete; remove free surface water before application of waterproofing
treatment.
D.
Exposed Surface Application: Apply waterproofing uniformly with semi-stiff bristle brush
or spray under conditions and application rate recommended by manufacturer.
E.
Curing: Cure exposed waterproofing treatment using a mist fog spray of clean water after
coating has hardened sufficiently not to be damaged by spray; do not use plastic sheeting laid
directly on waterproofing; air circulation is required. Cure in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations.
F.
Comply with waterproofing manufacturer's recommendations for sequencing construction
operations after waterproofing applications to avoid conditions detrimental to performance of
waterproofing application.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide manufacturer's field service consisting of product use
recommendations and periodic site visit for inspection of product installation in accordance
with manufacturer's instruction
B.
Do not cover waterproofed surfaces with other construction until they have been observed by
manufacturer's field representative and Architect/Engineer.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean spillage and overspray from adjacent surfaces using appropriate cleaning agents and
procedures.
B.
Protect installed product from damage during construction.
C.
Do not apply paint or other coatings for at least 21 days; before applying coatings neutralize
waterproofed surface as recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
D.
Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
SCHEDULE:
A.
Provide waterproofing of concrete substrates, using surface application, on the following
locations:
1.
On wall conditions where Manufactured Stone Veneer is indicated on the drawings.
END OF SECTION
CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING
071620-4
SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals: Product Data.
B.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: According to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INSULATION PRODUCTS
A.
Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation (Roof Insulation): Closed-cell, HCFC Free polyisocyanurate
foam core insulation integrally laminated to heavy non-asphaltic fiber-reinforced felt layers, FM
1-90 wind uplift classification, 25 psi compressive strength. Product to have Miami Dade
County Product Control Approval for use with Sheet Metal Roofing as specified in Section
076100 Sheet Metal Roofing.
B.
Foil-Faced Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class 1 or 2, with
flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
C.
Glass-Fiber-Board Insulation: ASTM C 612, Type IA; foil faced; nominal density of 2.25
lb/cu. ft. (36 kg/cu. m), with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 450,
respectively.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
D.
Atlas Roofing Corporation.
Dow Chemical Company (The).
Rmax, Inc.
CertainTeed Corporation.
Johns Manville.
Knauf Insulation.
Owens Corning.
Mineral-Wool Board Insulation: ASTM C 612, unfaced; nominal density of 6 lb/cu. ft. (96
kg/cu. m), with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 450, respectively.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
Fibrex Insulations Inc.
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 1
b.
c.
d.
e.
E.
Glass-Fiber-Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I, unfaced with flame-spread and smokedeveloped indexes of 25 and 450, respectively.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
F.
Isolatek International.
Owens Corning.
Roxul Inc.
Thermafiber.
CertainTeed Corporation.
Guardian Building Products, Inc.
Johns Manville.
Knauf Insulation.
Owens Corning.
Mineral-Fiber-Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I, unfaced with flame-spread index of
25 or less.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install insulation in areas and in thicknesses indicated or required to produce R-values indicated.
Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation.
B.
Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for
or protected from contact with insulation.
END OF SECTION 072100
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 2
SECTION 074100 - SHEET METAL ROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
1.3
Mechanically seamed metal panel roofing system.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 053100 - Steel Decking.
B.
Section 072100 – Thermal Insulation
C.
Section 079000 - Joint Sealers
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
B.
ASTM A 792/A 792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc
Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.
C.
ASTM D 226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in
Roofing and Waterproofing.
D.
ASTM D 2178 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and
Waterproofing.
E.
ASTM E 84 - Standard Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
F.
ASTM E 1592 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal
Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
G.
ASTM E 1646 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof
Panel Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
H.
ASTM E 1680 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Metal Roof Panel Systems.
I.
FM 4471 - Class 1 Panel Roof (Uplift Evaluation); Factory Mutual Research
Corporation.
J.
UL 580 - Standard for Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies.
K.
UL 790 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings.
L.
FM 4471 - Class 1 Roofing Panels.
M.
SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
N.
NRCA - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual.
SHEET METAL ROOFING
074100-1
1.4
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 013000.
B.
Miami Dade County Product Control Approval Notice of Acceptance.
C.
Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog data, detail sheets, and specifications.
D.
Shop Drawings: Prepared specifically for this project; showing dimensions of
metal roofing and accessories, fastening details and connections and interface with
other products.
E.
Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size
6 inches (150 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
1.7
Installer Qualifications: Certified and approved installer of the sheet metal roofing
manufacturer.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with
identification labels intact.
B.
Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at
temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer.
1.
Store materials above ground, on skids.
2.
Protect material with waterproof covering and allow sufficient ventilation to
prevent condensation buildup or moisture entrapment on the materials.
WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard
warranty document executed by authorized company official. Provide warranties as
follows:
1.
Warranty covering the metal substrate against rupture, perforation and
structural failure due to normal atmospheric corrosion.
2.
Warranty on paint finish against cracking, peeling, blistering, chalk and color
change.
3.
Provide PermaMetallics 2000, 20-year Kynar 500/Hylar 5000 limited finish
warranty.
4.
Provide 20-year warranty for Galvalume against corrosion and perforation.
B.
Manufacturer's Weathertightness Warranty:
1.
Warranty: Provide the manufacturers limited warrantee for workmanship and
material covering a period of 15 years from the date of substantial completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Basis of Design: Englert, Inc., which is located at: 1200 Amboy Ave. ; Perth
Amboy, NJ 08861; Toll Free Tel: 800-364-5378; Tel: 732-826-8614; Email:
SHEET METAL ROOFING
074100-2
c.mcguire@englertinc.com; Web: www.englertinc.com
2.2
B.
Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section
012500.
C.
Provide all sheet metal roofing and accessories from a single manufacturer.
COMMERCIAL/INTITUTIONAL SYSTEMS
A.
2.3
2.4
Mechanically Seamed Panels:
1.
Profile: Series S2000, 1 3/4 inch (50.8 mm) standing seam.
a.
Width: 14 or 18 inches (457 mm).
b.
Single-lock (90 degree seam).
c.
Wind Uplift Resistance: UL 580; Class 90, as noted on the drawings.
d.
Air Leakage: Passed when tested in accordance with ÅSTM E 1680.
e.
Water Penetration: None, when tested in accordance with ÅSTM E
1646.
f.
Flame Spread: Class 1 when tested in accordance with ÅSTM E 84.
g.
Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference: ASTM E 1592.
h.
Florida Building Code approval.
i.
Miami Dade County Product Control Approval.
ACCESSORlES
A.
Fasteners: As recommended by panel manufacturer for the system specified.
B.
Eave Protection Sheet: Rubberized asphalt bonded to sheet polyethylene, 40 mil (1
mm) total thickness, with strippable treated release paper.
C.
Base Sheet and Eave Protection Sheet: ASTM D226, Type I, 30 pound unperforated
asphalt saturated organic felts. Material listed in Miami-Dade County Product
Control Approval NOA.
D.
Sealant: Sealant as recommended by panel manufacturer.
E.
Flashings and Trim: As recommended by panel manufacturer. Exposed metal finish
to match roofing material.
MATERIALS
A.
Galvalume: ASTM A 792/A792M, AZ50, aluminum-zinc alloy coating.
1.
Base metal: Structural quality, 50ksi yield point, 52 ksi tensile strength.
2.
Thickness:
a.
24 gauge minimum.
3.
Finish:
a.
Permacolor 3500: Kynar 500/Hylar 5000 coating, 0.8 to 0.9 mil (0.020
to 0.023 mm) fluorocarbon full strength 70 percent Kynar 500 finish
coating over 0.2 to 0.3 mil (0.005 to 0.007 mm) urethane primer.
4.
Color:
a.
Preweathered Galvalume.
PART 3 EXECUTION
SHEET METAL ROOFING
074100-3
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine surfaces to receive sheet metal roofing. Notify the Architect in writing of
any defective conditions encountered. Starting of work shall constitute acceptance of
such conditions.
B.
Metal Deck Substrate:
1.
Inspect roof deck to verify deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions,
waves, or projections, and properly sloped.
2.
Verify deck is dry and joints are solidly supported and fastened.
3.
Verify wood nailers are installed and correctly located.
C.
Structural Framing Substrate:
1.
Verify primary and secondary framing members are installed and fastened,
properly aligned and sloped.
2.
Verify damaged shop coatings are repaired with touch up paint.
D.
Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly
set, reglets are in place, and nailing strips located.
E.
Correct defective conditions before beginning work.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in conformance with Miami Dade County Product Control Approval NOA, the
NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual and manufacturers installation
instructions and recommendations, whichever is most stringent.
B.
Form panel shape as indicated on Drawings, accurate in size, square, and free from
distortion or defects.
C.
Install base sheet and eave protection sheet underlayment as recommended by the
manufacturer.
D.
Install all panels continuous from ridge to eave. Transverse seams are not permitted.
E.
Where not otherwise indicated conform to SMACNA details including flashings and
trim.
F.
Install sealants where indicated to clean dry surfaces only without skips or voids..
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products until completion of project.
B.
Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
SHEET METAL ROOFING
074100-4
SECTION 078400 - FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fireresistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing
penetrating items.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: For penetrations through fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty
openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through-penetration firestop
systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements
indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating
of construction penetrated.
B.
Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings
determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479:
1.
2.
F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings not less
than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration firestop
systems with T-ratings as well as F-ratings, where systems protect penetrating items
exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas:
a.
b.
C.
For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical
damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions
both during and after construction.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Penetrations located outside wall cavities.
Penetrations located outside fire-resistance-rated shaft enclosures.
For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moistureresistant through-penetration firestop systems.
For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches (100 mm) in width and
exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting
floor loads involved, either by installing floor plates or by other means.
For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems
not requiring removal of insulation.
For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread
and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per
ASTM E 84.
FIRESTOPPING
078400 - 1
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, submit documentation,
including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency, showing each type of
construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and type of
penetrating item.
1.
C.
1.4
Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting
agency's illustration for a particular through-penetration firestop condition, submit
illustration, with modifications marked, approved by through-penetration firestop system
manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fireresistance-rated assembly.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FMG according to FMG 4991,
"Approval of Firestop Contractors."
B.
Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems in
Project to a single qualified installer.
C.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply
with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements"
Article:
1.
2.
Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A
qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, or another agency performing testing and
follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per testing standard
referenced in "Part 1 Performance Requirements" Article. Provide rated systems bearing
classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
D.
Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration
firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.
E.
Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed
behind other construction until each installation has been examined by building inspector, if
required by authorities having jurisdiction.
FIRESTOPPING
078400 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, through-penetration firestop
systems that may be incorporated into the Work include products manufactured by the
following:
1.
Hilti, Inc.
2.
3M; Fire Protection Products Division.
3.
Tremco; Sealant/Weatherproofing Division.
4.
USG Corporation.
FIRESTOPPING
A.
Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one
another; with the substrates forming openings; and with the items, if any, penetrating throughpenetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by
through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B.
Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are needed
to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use
only components specified by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved
by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance
Requirements" Article and with firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions
and published drawings for products and applications indicated.
B.
Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support
fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional
shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
1.
C.
After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible
forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of
firestop systems.
Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:
1.
2.
3.
Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and
penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and
penetrating items.
For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce
smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
FIRESTOPPING
078400 - 3
D.
Identification: Identify through-penetration firestop systems with preprinted metal or plastic
labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of edge
of the firestop systems so that labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating
items or firestop systems. Use mechanical fasteners for metal labels. Include the following
information on labels:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.2
The words "Warning - Through-Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb. Notify
Building Management of Any Damage."
Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
Date of installation.
Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's name.
Installer's name.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspecting Agency: Owner may engage an independent inspecting agency to inspect throughpenetration firestops. Independent inspecting agency shall comply with ASTM E 2174
requirements including those related to qualifications, conducting inspections, and preparing
test reports.
B.
Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through-penetration firestop systems so they
comply with requirements.
C.
Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop systems with other construction only after
inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with requirements.
END OF SECTION 078400
FIRESTOPPING
078400 - 4
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications, including those specified by
reference to this Section:
1.
Interior and exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 099110 – Painting and Coatings
1.2
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous
joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
B.
Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and waterresistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B.
Samples: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants
in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material matching the
appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
C.
Preconstruction field test reports.
D.
Compatibility and adhesion test reports.
E.
Product certificates.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit samples of materials that will
contact or affect joint sealants to joint-sealant manufacturers for testing according to
ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are
required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.
B.
Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their
adhesion to Project joint substrates according to the method in ASTM C 1193 that is appropriate
for the types of Project joints.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 1
1.5
WARRANTY
A.
Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or
replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements
specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1.
B.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant
manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not
comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified
warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2
articles.
B.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other
Part 2 articles.
2.2
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B.
VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that comply
with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D
(EPA Method 24):
1.
2.
3.
C.
2.3
Sealants: 250 g/L.
Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each
liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920
classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 2
B.
Stain-Test-Response Characteristics:
Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be
nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to
ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
C.
Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for Use I for
joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone
testing according to ASTM C 1247 and qualify for the length of exposure indicated by reference
to ASTM C 920 for Class 1 or 2. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless
otherwise indicated.
D.
Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will
come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.
E.
Single-Component Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant:
1.
Products:
a.
Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Omniseal.
b.
Tremco; Spectrem 3.
c.
Dow Corning Corporation; 795.
d.
GE Silicones; UltraPruf II SCS2900.
e.
Pecora Corporation; 898.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
Class: 100/50.
Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates
indicated, O.
Stain-Test-Response Characteristics:
Nonstaining to porous substrates per
ASTM C 1248.
6.
F.
Single-Component Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant:
1.
Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G.
Dow Corning Corporation; 799.
GE Silicones; UltraGlaze SSG4000AC.
Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI-631.
Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM5731 Poly-Glaze Plus.
Tremco; Proglaze SG.
Tremco; Spectrem 2.
Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
Class: 25.
Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
Uses Related to Joint Substrates: G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant:
1.
Products:
a.
JOINT SEALANTS
Pecora Corporation; 898.
079200 - 3
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
H.
Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
Class: 25.
Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
Uses Related to Joint Substrates: G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
Multicomponent Nonsag Urethane Sealant:
1.
Products:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.4
Tremco; Tremsil 600 White.
Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol II.
Tremco; Dymeric 511.
Tremco; Vulkem 922.
Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and NS (nonsag).
Class: 50.
Uses Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic) and T (traffic).
Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated,
O.
ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag,
paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces
airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as
demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1.
Products:
a.
b.
B.
Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard, nondrying, nonhardening,
nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior
concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission.
1.
Products:
a.
b.
2.5
Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.
United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
Pecora Corporation; BA-98.
Tremco; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.
PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of precured
low-modulus silicone extrusion, in sizes to fit joint widths indicated, combined with a neutralcuring silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates.
1.
Products:
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 4
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.6
Dow Corning Corporation; 123 Silicone Seal.
GE Silicones; UltraSpan US1100.
Pecora Corporation; Sil-Span.
Tremco; Spectrem Ez Seal.
JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A.
General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible
with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications
indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B.
Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface
skin), O (open-cell material) B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of the preceding
types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and
of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum
sealant performance:
C.
Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying
with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at
temperatures down to minus 26 deg F. Provide products with low compression set and of size
and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to
optimum sealant performance.
D.
Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or
joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide selfadhesive tape where applicable.
2.7
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests and field tests.
B.
Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants
and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or
harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to
promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C.
Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 5
1.
Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of
joint sealant.
a.
2.
Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning,
mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound
substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose
particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out
joints with oil-free compressed air.
Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
a.
Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain,
harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint
sealants.
B.
Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant
manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply
primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to
areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining
surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by
cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling
without disturbing joint seal.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
B.
Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for
use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and
conditions indicated.
C.
Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1.
2.
3.
Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and
replace them with dry materials.
D.
Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants
and backs of joints.
E.
Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1.
Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 6
2.
3.
F.
Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform
beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of
sealant with sides of joint.
1.
2.
3.
Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise
indicated.
G.
Installation of Preformed Silicone-Sealant System:
instructions.
Comply with manufacturer's written
H.
Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after
removing protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, producing seal
continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient
temperatures where expansion of sealant requires acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to
sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
I.
Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of
products in which joints occur.
END OF SECTION 079200
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 7
SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
Standard hollow metal doors and frames.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Miami Dade County Product Control Approval for impact rated systems for all exterior
doors/frames.
C.
Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses,
preparations for hardware, and other details.
D.
Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for
details and openings as those on Drawings.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled
by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at as close to
neutral pressure as possible according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B.
B.
Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are
listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or
UL 9. Label each individual glazed lite.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with
minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.
B.
Frame Anchors:
ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating
designation; mill phosphatized.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 1
1.
For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M
or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class B.
C.
Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
D.
Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as measured
according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.
E.
Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I.
F.
Glazing: Division 8 Section "Glazing."
G.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil
(0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat.
2.2
STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A.
General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Comply with
ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:
1.
C.
2.3
Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless).
Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. Provide doors complying
with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and
ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:
1.
D.
Design: Flush panel.
Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard insulated with polystyrene, polyurethane,
polyisocyanurate or mineral-board, and vertical steel-stiffener core.
Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Seamless.
Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick, end
closures or channels of same material as face sheets.
Tolerances: SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless).
Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6.
STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A.
General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.
B.
Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.
1.
2.
3.
Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.
Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated.
Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet minimum.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 2
C.
Interior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.
1.
2.
3.
D.
2.4
Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.
Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated.
Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet minimum.
Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6.
FRAME ANCHORS
A.
Jamb Anchors:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick,
and as follows:
1.
2.
2.5
Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not
less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2
inches (50 mm) wide by 10 inches (250 mm) long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177
inch (4.5 mm) thick.
Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042
inch (1.0 mm) thick.
Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch(9.5-mm-) diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from
frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.
Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.
Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips,
allowing not less than 2-inch (50-mm) height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at
finish floor surface.
HOLLOW METAL PANELS
A.
2.6
Provide hollow metal panels of same materials, construction, and finish as specified for
adjoining hollow metal work.
STOPS AND MOLDINGS
A.
Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch (16
mm) high unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick minimum, same
material as frames.
2.7
ACCESSORIES
A.
Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding.
B.
Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4-inch-thick by 1-inch- (6.4-mm-thick by 25.4-mm-) wide steel.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 3
C.
2.8
Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick.
FABRICATION
A.
Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.
B.
Hollow Metal Doors:
1.
2.
C.
Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors. Seal joints in
top edges of doors against water penetration. Provide flush tops.
Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors.
Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or
angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth,
flush, and invisible.
Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners
unless otherwise indicated.
Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be
grouted.
Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot
welds per anchor.
Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a.
Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and
bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as
follows:
1)
2)
3)
4)
b.
Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and
bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as
follows:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6.
Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high.
Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high.
Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches (2286 to 3048 mm) high.
Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches
(610 mm) or fraction thereof above 120 inches (3048 mm) high.
Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high.
Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high.
Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) high.
Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches
(610 mm) or fraction thereof above 96 inches (2438 mm) high.
Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches (1066 mm) wide and
mounted in metal-stud partitions.
Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers.
a.
Single-Door Frames: Three door silencers.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 4
D.
Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised
hardware according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in
Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.9
Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.
Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted door
hardware.
Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series
specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.
Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with
Division 16 electrical Sections.
STEEL FINISHES
A.
Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
1.
Shop Primer: ANSI/SDI A250.10.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Hollow Metal Frames: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11.
1.
Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving
surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor,
and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
a.
3.
At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.
Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling
limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously;
grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been
properly set and secured.
Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim
as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout
containing antifreezing agents.
Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled
expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.
Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 5
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space
between frames and masonry with grout.
Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Take
precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged
by grout forces.
In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled
expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible
on exposed faces.
In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion
anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make
smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead
structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to
other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for
securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to
frame jamb members.
Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment,
twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified
below. Shim as necessary.
1.
Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.2
Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line
90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal
line parallel to plane of wall.
Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of
jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.
Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6
mm).
Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4
inch (19 mm).
Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B.
Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 6
C.
Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 081113
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 7
SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.2
Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces.
Factory finishing flush wood doors.
Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include factory-finishing specifications.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and
other pertinent data.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
1.3
Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
Indicate requirements for veneer matching.
Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.
Samples: For factory-finished doors.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by
an FSC-accredited certification body.
B.
Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's "Architectural
Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated."
C.
Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
A.
Low-Emitting Materials: Fabricate doors with adhesives and composite wood products that do
not contain urea formaldehyde.
B.
WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade:
1.
Extra Heavy Duty.
C.
Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors:
1.
Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10.
a.
b.
D.
Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fireprotection rating indicated.
1.
2.
2.2
Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf (3100 N).
Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf (1780 N).
Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer
stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated
without formed-steel edges and astragals. Comply with specified requirements for
exposed edges.
VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A.
Interior Solid-Core Doors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.3
Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces.
Species: Select white birch.
Cut: Rotary cut.
Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match.
Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match.
Core: Either glued wood stave or structural composite lumber.
Construction: Five or seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit
abrasive planed before veneering.
LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES
A.
Metal Louvers:
1.
Metal and Finish: Extruded aluminum with dark bronze, Class II, color anodic finish,
AA-M12C22A32/A34.
B.
Metal Frames for Light Openings: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048-inch- (1.2mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; with baked-enamel- or powder-coated finish; and approved
for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated. Color as selected by Architect.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416 - 2
2.4
FABRICATION
A.
Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of
referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
B.
Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.
C.
Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory.
1.
2.
3.
2.5
Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with
applicable requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."
Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.
FACTORY FINISHING
A.
General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication,
including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied,
before finishing.
1.
Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be
omitted on bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.
B.
Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish. Field finish doors
indicated to receive opaque finish.
C.
Use only paints and coatings that comply with the testing and product requirements of the
California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
D.
Transparent Finish:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Grade: Premium.
Finish: AWI conversion varnish or catalyzed polyurethane system.
Staining: Match Architect's sample.
Effect: Open-grain finish.
Sheen: Satin.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."
B.
Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and
the referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416 - 3
1.
C.
Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels; do not trim
stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors.
Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting
and machining.
1.
Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors.
Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or
covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4
inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.
a.
D.
Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at
Project site.
END OF SECTION 081416
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416 - 4
SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
Verify that Section titles referenced in this Section are correct for this Project's Specifications; Section
titles may have changed.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C.
Samples: For each door face material in specified finish.
D.
Schedule: Types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to
installation.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to
assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per the following test method and that are
listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction:
1.
2.
1.4
NFPA 252 or UL 10B for vertical access doors and frames.
ASTM E 119 or UL 263 for horizontal access doors and frames.
COORDINATION
A.
Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to
concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work, and indicate in the schedule
specified in "Submittals" Article.
ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
083113 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
STEEL MATERIALS
A.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1.
2.
ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products.
ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
B.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS) with A60 (ZF180)
zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating or G60 (Z180) mill-phosphatized zinc coating.
C.
Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1.
Baked-Enamel Finish: Minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm).
D.
Drywall Beads: 0.0299-inch (0.76-mm) zinc-coated steel sheet to receive joint compound.
E.
Plaster Beads: 0.0299-inch (0.76-mm) zinc-coated steel sheet with flange of expanded metal
lath.
2.2
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS
A.
Flush Access Doors and Frames with Trimless Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel
sheet.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.3
Locations: Wall and ceiling.
Door: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick galvanized sheet metal.
Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick galvanize sheet metal with drywall bead
flange.
Hinges: Continuous piano.
Latch: Cam latch with interior release.
Lock: Cylinder.
FABRICATION
A.
General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for
installation.
B.
Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view, provide materials with smooth, flat
surfaces without blemishes.
C.
Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish
attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports
indicated.
D.
Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when
closed.
ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
083113 - 2
1.
For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.
B.
Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels
aligned with adjacent finish surfaces.
C.
Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.
3.2
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.
B.
Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
END OF SECTION 083113
ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
083113 - 3
SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
Exterior and interior storefront framing, non-impact resistant.
Exterior manual-swing entrance doors and door frame units, impact resistant.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following
performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective
manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction:
1.
2.
3.
Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to,
story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.
Failure includes the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Deflection exceeding specified limits.
Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.
Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and
structural movements to glazing.
Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements.
Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
Failure of operating units.
B.
Delegated Design: Design aluminum-framed systems, including comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design
criteria indicated.
C.
Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
D.
Deflection of Framing Members:
1.
2.
E.
Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to
glass plane shall not exceed L/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite
or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch (19 mm),
whichever is less.
Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to L/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch (3.2
mm), whichever is smaller.
For Exterior Applications:
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113 - 1
1.
2.
Storefronts: Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested
according to Florida Building Code requirements for exterior installation for non-impact
systems.
Entrances: Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested
according to Florida Building Code requirements for exterior installation for impact
systems.
F.
For Exterior Applications: Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum
air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.03 L/s per sq. m) of
fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure
difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa) unless Florida Building Code requirements outline more
stringent requirements.
G.
For Exterior Applications: Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed
systems that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when
tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of
positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other work.
1.
Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of
moisture in the system to the exterior.
C.
Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.
D.
Other Action Submittals:
1.
Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier,
detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and
diagrams.
E.
Miami Dade County Product Control Approval Notice of Acceptance.
F.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed systems indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Product test reports.
B.
Field quality-control reports.
C.
Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113 - 2
1.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for installation of units required for this Project.
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.
C.
Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including Shop
Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems
similar to those indicated for this Project.
D.
Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for
systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by
dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate
to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are
indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction
testing, field testing, and in-service performance.
E.
Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and
ICC/ANSI A117.1.
F.
Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single
manufacturer.
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
B.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal
weathering.
1.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Mr.
Glass Doors & Windows, Inc. Commercial Storefronts and Doors, or comparable product by
one of the following:
1.
EFCO Corporation.
2.
Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company.
3.
SMI Aluminum Systems LLC
4.
Trulite Glass Alum Solutions, LLC.
5.
YKK AP America Inc.
MATERIALS
A.
Aluminum:
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.
Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.
Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer, complying
with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and
pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPCSP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
FRAMING SYSTEMS
A.
Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness
required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1.
2.
3.
Construction: Nonthermal.
Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.
Glazing Plane: As indicated.
B.
Brackets and Reinforcements:
Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with
nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
C.
Fasteners and Accessories:
Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,
nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113 - 4
1.
2.
3.
Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from
thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.
Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
Where fasteners are exposed use fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw
heads, finished to match framing system.
D.
Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts,
complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M.
E.
Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding
flashing compatible with adjacent materials.
F.
Framing System Gaskets and Sealants:
manufacturer for joint type.
1.
2.4
Manufacturer's standard, recommended by
Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
GLAZING SYSTEMS
A.
Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."
B.
Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded,
of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.
C.
Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type.
2.5
ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS
A.
Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.
1.
Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch (44.5-mm) overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch(3.2-mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten
corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that
incorporate concealed tie rods.
2.
Door Design: Medium stile; 3-1/2-inch (88.9-mm) nominal width.
a.
3.
Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and structural
sealant.
a.
B.
Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches
(255 mm) above floor or ground plane.
Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.
Additional Entrance Door Hardware: As specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113 - 5
2.6
ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE
A.
General: Provide entrance door hardware for each entrance door to comply with requirements
in this Section.
1.
2.
3.
Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and
products complying with BHMA standard referenced.
Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of
operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated.
Opening-Force Requirements:
a.
b.
Egress Doors: Not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch and not more than
30 lbf (133 N) to set the door in motion and not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to open
the door to its minimum required width.
Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N) to fully open door.
B.
Opening-Force Requirements:
1.
Latches and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf (67 N) required to release latch.
C.
Continuous-Gear Hinges: Manufacturer's standard with stainless-steel bearings between
knuckles, fabricated to full height of door and frame.
D.
Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.
E.
Panic Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1, listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing
according to UL 305.
F.
Cylinders: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.
1.
Keying: Master key system. Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control
number and include notation "DO NOT DUPLICATE".
G.
Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for
aluminum framing.
H.
Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6.
I.
Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1, with accessories required for a complete installation, sized
as required by door size, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use; adjustable to
meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.
J.
Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.
K.
Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed fasteners
on mounting strip.
L.
Thresholds: BHMA A156.21, raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 1:2, with
maximum height of 1/2 inch (13 mm).,ADA Accessible with ¼” high weather stripping stop.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113 - 6
2.7
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
2.8
Bituminous Paint:
Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12
requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per
coat.
FABRICATION
A.
Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
B.
Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration
of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or
grinding.
C.
Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following
characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture
migrating within the system to exterior.
Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to
maintain required glazing edge clearances.
Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior.
Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest
extent possible.
D.
Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.
E.
Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and
for installing entrance door hardware.
F.
Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.
G.
Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest
extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying
finishes.
H.
After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to
Shop Drawings.
2.9
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113 - 7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions, Miami-Dade County NOA’s, and
approved shop drawings.
Do not install damaged components.
Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
deterioration.
Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
Metal Protection:
1.
2.
Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing
nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting
contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C.
Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing
members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
D.
Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 07 Section
"Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.
E.
Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without
warp or rack.
F.
Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."
G.
Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.
1.
2.
3.2
Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather
stripping.
Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door
hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using
concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE SETS
Door Hardware Set No. 1
Each door to have the following:
Qty.
1
Item
Continuous Gear Hinge
Description
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113 - 8
1
1
1
1
1
1
Closing Devices
Panic Device
Threshold
Perimeter Weatherstrip
Door Bottom Sweep Strip
Door Bottom Drip Strip
Cush and Stop
Concealed Vertical Rod, Push Pad, Tubular Lever
In addition, pairs of doors shall each have two sets of weather stripping at meeting
stiles.
END OF SECTION 084113
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113 - 9
SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes:
1.
Mechanical door hardware for the following:
a.
2.
B.
Cylinders for door hardware specified in other Sections.
Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the products listed below.
Coordinating and scheduling the purchase and delivery of these products remain requirements
of this Section.
1.
1.2
Swinging doors.
Thresholds, weather stripping and lock cylinders to be installed under other Sections.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
C.
Other Action Submittals:
1.
Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing
fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and
diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work
to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
a.
b.
Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as
in the Contract Documents.
Content: Include the following information:
1)
2)
3)
4)
2.
Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each
door and frame.
Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor
plans and to door and frame schedule.
Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style,
function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product.
Description of electrified door hardware sequences of operation and
interfaces with other building control systems.
Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing Owner's
final keying instructions for locks.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 1
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved
by product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the
course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and
keying.
B.
Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in providing
consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and
extent to that indicated for this Project.
C.
Source Limitations: Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical
door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications
and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction are acceptable.
D.
Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated door assemblies are indicated, provide door
hardware rated for use in assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive
pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch.
Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.
F.
Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with
the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility
Guidelines.
1.
2.
Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the
wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N).
Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
G.
1.4
A.
Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to
door.
Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied parallel to door at latch.
Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.
Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more
than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high.
Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door
will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured
to the leading edge of the door.
Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 2
B.
1.5
A.
Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner and obtain receipt.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise
indicated.
a.
Exit Devices: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
b.
Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled on Drawings to comply with requirements in
this Section.
1.
2.2
A.
2.3
A.
2.4
A.
Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and products
complying with BHMA designations referenced.
HINGES
Hinges: BHMA A156.1.
CONTINUOUS HINGES
Continuous Hinges: BHMA A156.26; minimum 0.120-inch- (3.0-mm-) thick, hinge leaves
with minimum overall width of 4 inches (102 mm); fabricated to full height of door and frame
and to template screw locations; with components finished after milling and drilling are
complete.
MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES
Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with
requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended
to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by
manufacturer.
Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim.
Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum
framing.
Rabbet Front and Strike: Provide on locksets for rabbeted meeting stiles.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 3
B.
2.5
Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2; Grade 1; Series 4000.
AUXILIARY LOCKS
A.
Bored Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5: Grade 1; with strike that suits frame.
B.
Push-Button Combination Locks: BHMA A156.5; cylindrical; Grade 1; lock opens by entering
a one- to five-digit code by pushing correct buttons in correct sequence; automatically relocks
when door is closed; with strike that suits frame.
2.6
A.
2.7
A.
2.8
A.
2.9
A.
2.10
A.
EXIT LOCKS AND EXIT ALARMS
Exit Locks and Alarms: BHMA A156.29, Grade 1.
MANUAL FLUSH BOLTS
Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16; minimum 3/4-inch (19-mm) throw; designed for
mortising into door edge.
AUTOMATIC AND SELF-LATCHING FLUSH BOLTS
Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16; minimum 3/4-inch (19-mm)
throw; designed for mortising into door edge.
EXIT DEVICES AND AUXILIARY ITEMS
Exit Devices and Auxiliary Items: BHMA A156.3.
LOCK CYLINDERS
Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel
silver.
1.
Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locking devices.
B.
Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of construction
keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys.
C.
Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores.
Provide 10 construction master keys.
2.11
A.
KEYING
Keying System:
Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28,
Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 4
1.
B.
Grand Master Key System: Change keys, a master key, and a grand master key operate
cylinders.
Keys: Nickel silver.
1.
Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include
the following notation:
a.
2.
Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.12
A.
2.13
A.
2.14
Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE."
Cylinder Change Keys: Three.
Master Keys: Five.
Grand Master Keys: Five.
Great-Grand Master Keys: Five.
KEY CONTROL SYSTEM
Key Control Cabinet: BHMA A156.5; metal cabinet with baked-enamel finish; containing keyholding hooks, labels, 2 sets of key tags with self-locking key holders, key-gathering envelopes,
and temporary and permanent markers; with key capacity of 150 percent of the number of locks.
1.
Wall-Mounted Cabinet: Cabinet with hinged-panel door equipped with key-holding
panels and pin-tumbler cylinder door lock.
OPERATING TRIM
Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6; stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated.
ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS
A.
Coordinators: BHMA A156.3; consisting of active-leaf, hold-open lever and inactive-leaf
release trigger; fabricated from steel with nylon-coated strike plates; with built-in, adjustable
safety release; and with internal override.
B.
Carry-Open Bars: BHMA A156.3; prevent the inactive leaf from opening before the active
leaf; provide polished brass or bronze carry-open bars with strike plate for inactive leaves of
pairs of doors unless automatic or self-latching bolts are used.
C.
Astragals: BHMA A156.22.
2.15
A.
SURFACE CLOSERS
Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and
latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with
manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door,
exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable
to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 5
2.16
A.
2.17
A.
2.18
A.
2.19
A.
2.20
A.
2.21
A.
MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS
Floor-Mounted Stops: BHMA A156.16; polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum base metal.
DOOR GASKETING
Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; air leakage not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot (0.000774 cu.
m/s per m) of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to
ASTM E 283; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily
available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
THRESHOLDS
Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated.
PLASTIC PROTECTION PLATES
Plastic Protection Plates: BHMA A156.6; fabricated with four sides beveled; rigid plastic;
0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick, PVC or acrylic-modified vinyl plastic.
AUXILIARY DOOR HARDWARE
Auxiliary Hardware: BHMA A156.16.
FABRICATION
Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared
for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially
recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not
permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door
hardware, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed,
except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for
installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means
of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door
and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt.
Fire-Rated Applications:
a.
Wood or Machine Screws: For the following:
1)
2)
3)
b.
DOOR HARDWARE
Hinges mortised to doors or frames; use threaded-to-the-head wood screws
for wood doors and frames.
Strike plates to frames.
Closers to doors and frames.
Steel Through Bolts: For the following unless door blocking is provided:
087100 - 6
1)
2)
3)
3.
4.
5.
2.22
Surface hinges to doors.
Closers to doors and frames.
Surface-mounted exit devices.
Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors.
Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended
Fasteners for Wood Doors."
Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and
elsewhere as indicated.
FINISHES
A.
Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames
according to ANSI/SDI A250.6.
B.
Wood Doors: Comply with DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations
for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors."
C.
Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless
otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where
cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be
painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface
protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not install
surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
1.
2.
E.
Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8.
Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831.
Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for
Wood Flush Doors."
Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment
substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.
Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space
fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than
the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 7
inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of
support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.
F.
Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction
period.
1.
2.
Replace construction cores with permanent cores as directed by Owner.
Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation.
G.
Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system
cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule.
H.
Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant
complying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
I.
Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door
hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic.
J.
Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.
K.
Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.
L.
Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.
M.
Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure
proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as
intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and
ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
3.2
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner will engage a qualified independent
Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 087100
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 8
SECTION 088000 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified
in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:
1.
Storefront framing.
2.
Glazed entrances.
3.
Doors with glazed lites.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.3
For Exterior Products: Miami Dade County Product Control Approval Notice of Acceptance.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B.
Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12
inches (300 mm) square.
C.
Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use
same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers
and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these
publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
1.
2.
3.
4.
GLAZING
GANA Publications: GANA's "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and GANA's
"Glazing Manual."
AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and
AAMA TIR-A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."
IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Guidelines for Sloped
Glazing."
IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing
Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."
088000 - 1
B.
Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing
with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and
safety glazing standard with which glass complies.
C.
Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-protection-rated glazing with
certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall
indicate manufacturer's name, test standard, whether glazing is for use in fire doors or other
openings, whether or not glazing passes hose-stream test, whether or not glazing has a
temperature rise rating of 450 deg F (250 deg C), and the fire-resistance rating in minutes.
1.6
WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in
which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within
specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from
normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass
contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other
indications of deterioration in coating.
1.
B.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which
laminated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within
specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed
from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning
laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge
separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding
those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.
1.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A.
Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum.
thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.
B.
Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated
float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance
Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heattreated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass. Where fully tempered glass is indicated,
provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.
C.
Windborne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Provide exterior glazing that passes the Miami Dade
County Product Control Approval large missile impact testing requirements. Test specimens
GLAZING
Provide glass lites in
088000 - 2
shall be no smaller in width and length than glazing indicated for use on the Project and shall be
installed in same manner as glazing indicated for use on the Project.
1.
D.
Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties
specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated
below:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Large-Missile Test: For glazing located within 30 feet (9.1 m) of grade.
U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's
WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K).
Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values,
according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.
Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.
GLASS PRODUCTS
A.
Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise
indicated; of kind and condition indicated.
1.
Exterior Glass Tint Color: Green tint.
2.
Thickness: 1/4 inch.
3.
Provide safety glazing labeling.
C.
Uncoated Tinted Float Glass: Class 2, complying with other requirements specified.
2.3
LAMINATED GLASS
A.
For Exterior Glazed Doors and Doors with Glazed Lites: Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistant
Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for
Category II materials, with "Windborne-Debris-Impact Resistance" Paragraph in "Glass
Products, General" Article, and with other requirements specified. Use materials that have a
proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties
after fabrication and installation.
1.
Construction: Laminate glass with one of the following to comply with interlayer
manufacturer's written recommendations:
a.
Polyvinyl butyral interlayer.
b.
Polyvinyl butyral interlayers reinforced with polyethylene terephthalate film.
2.
Thickness of Each Glass Ply and Interlayer Thickness: As required for Miami Dade
County Product Control Approval NOA for specified wind pressures.
3.
Provide safety glazing labeling.
4.
Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.
5.
Glass Color: Green tint unless otherwise indicated.
GLAZING
088000 - 3
2.4
GLAZING GASKETS
A.
2.5
Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to
maintain watertight seal, made from the following:
GLAZING SEALANTS
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with
other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units,
and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at
time of installation.
Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, shall have a VOC content of not more
than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the testing and
product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice
for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers."
Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.
B.
Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.
C.
Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Products that are approved by testing
agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which they are used for
applications and fire-protection ratings indicated.
2.6
MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A.
Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
B.
Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or
minus 5.
C.
Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass
manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
D.
Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side
walking).
E.
Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and
density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant
performance.
GLAZING
088000 - 4
F.
Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that
listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fireprotection rating indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GLAZING, GENERAL
A.
Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and
other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
referenced glazing publications.
B.
Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to
provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant
thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.
C.
Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from
Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or
other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and
appearance.
D.
Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction testing.
E.
Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F.
Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
G.
Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm).
H.
Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways
in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to
requirements in referenced glazing publications.
3.2
GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A.
Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings
exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.
B.
Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place
with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
C.
Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and
press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and
installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners
and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without
GLAZING
088000 - 5
developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket
manufacturer.
D.
Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and
press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressureglazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to
produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints
with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
E.
Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
3.3
SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
A.
Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass
lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding
into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and
backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance
for optimum sealant performance.
B.
Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond
of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C.
Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
3.4
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers
to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove
nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B.
Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with
glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
C.
Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at
frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum,
alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
D.
Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from
natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
END OF SECTION 088000
GLAZING
088000 - 6
SECTION 089000 - LOUVERS AND VENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Fixed, extruded-aluminum louvers.
B.
See Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for louvers in hollow-metal doors.
C.
See Division 08 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for louvers in flush wood doors.
D.
See Division 23 Sections for louvers that are a part of mechanical equipment.
1.2
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following
loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation
of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter, or
permanent damage to fasteners and anchors.
1.
2.
B.
1.3
Wind Loads: Determine loads based on pressures as indicated on Drawings.
Infiltration and Impact Resistance: Product to have active Miami Dade County Product
Control Approval Notice of Acceptance for impact resistant louver products.
Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as
demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length
and width according to AMCA 500-L.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Miami Dade County Product Control Approval Notice of Acceptance.
B.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.
For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing
specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.
C.
Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing.
D.
Samples: For each type of metal finish required.
LOUVERS AND VENTS
089000 - 1
E.
1.4
Delegated-Design Submittal: For louvers indicated to comply with structural performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Test Reports: Based on tests performed according to AMCA 500-L.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.
B.
Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required
for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.
C.
Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
2.2
For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners.
For fastening galvanized steel, use hot-dip-galvanized steel or 300 series stainless-steel
fasteners.
For fastening stainless steel, use 300 series stainless-steel fasteners.
For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances
made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter
sealant joints.
B.
Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from
view unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between
frame members necessary.
2.3
FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS
A.
Horizontal or Vertical Storm-Resistant Louver:
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product.
2.
Louver Depth: as noted on the drawings.
3.
AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.
LOUVERS AND VENTS
089000 - 2
2.4
LOUVER SCREENS
A.
General: Provide screen at each exterior louver.
B.
Louver Screen Frames: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens
are attached.
C.
Louver Screening:
1.
2.5
Bird Screening: Aluminum, 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) square mesh, 0.063-inch (1.60-mm)
wire.
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.
B.
Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where
required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.
C.
Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as
indicated.
D.
Repair damaged finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot
be refinished in the field to the factory and refinish entire unit or provide new units.
E.
Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry,
or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of
bituminous paint.
END OF SECTION 089000
LOUVERS AND VENTS
089000 - 3
SECTION 092116 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes the following:
1.
Interior gypsum board.
2.
Tile backing panels.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples: For the following products:
1.
Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- (300-mm-) long length for each trim
accessory indicated.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an
independent testing agency.
B.
STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical
to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to
ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A.
General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to
type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
G-P Gypsum.
b.
National Gypsum Company.
c.
USG Corporation.
B.
Regular Type:
1.
Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).
2.
Long Edges: Tapered.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
092116 - 1
C.
Type X:
1.
Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).
2.
Long Edges: Tapered.
D.
Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board.
1.
Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).
2.
Long Edges: Tapered.
E.
Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: With moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces.
1.
Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X.
2.
Long Edges: Tapered.
2.2
TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
2.3
Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1.
Material: Plastic.
2.
Shapes:
a.
Cornerbead.
b.
Bullnose bead.
c.
LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
d.
L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
e.
U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.
f.
Expansion (control) joint.
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B.
Joint Tape:
1.
2.
C.
2.4
Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.
Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1.
Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.
2.
Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and
trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
a.
Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.
3.
Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
4.
Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
092116 - 2
B.
Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering
gypsum panels to continuous substrate.
1.
Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
C.
Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.
D.
Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag
wool, or rock wool.
1.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies:
Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of
assembly.
E.
Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
1.
Provide sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A.
Comply with ASTM C 840.
B.
Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
C.
Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural
abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these
locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints
between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
3.2
APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A.
3.3
Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1.
Regular Type: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Type X: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly.
3.
Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces.
4.
Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: At Toilet Rooms, Janitor and food service areas,
vertical surfaces. In addition, at all vertical surfaces behind plumbing fixtures use WaterResistant Gypsum Backing Board unless tile backer board is specified.
INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
092116 - 3
B.
Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations
approved by Architect for visual effect.
C.
Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1.
Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.
2.
L-Bead: Use where indicated.
3.4
FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A.
General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for
decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B.
Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.
C.
Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended
for tape.
D.
Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below:
1.
Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.
2.
Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. Also where wall will be covered by decorative
or acoustical panels or finished with carpet.
3.
Level 5: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated.
a.
Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections.
3.5
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B.
Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1.
Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2.
Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 092116
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
092116 - 4
SECTION 092200 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies.
Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings and soffits.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested
according to ASTM E 119.
B.
STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in
assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413.
C.
Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel
products such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled
content is not less than 25 percent.
2.2
FRAMING SYSTEMS
A.
Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel
studs and runners of equivalent minimum base-metal thickness.
1.
2.
B.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch (0.84 mm).
Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following in thickness not less than
indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs:
1.
2.
Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- (51-mm-) deep
flanges, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging
located within 12 inches (305 mm) of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing.
Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- (51-mm-)
deep flanges and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092200 - 1
3.
Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes
due to deflection of structure above.
C.
Firestop Tracks: Manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement
of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in
thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
D.
Flat Strap and Backing Plate:
indicated.
1.
E.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch (0.84 mm).
Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm).
Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum
1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).
Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38 by 38 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.72-mm-)
thick, galvanized steel.
Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
1.
2.
G.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch (0.84 mm).
Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) minimum base-metal thickness,
with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.
1.
2.
F.
Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width
Depth: 3/4 inch (19 mm).
Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum
uncoated-steel thickness of 0.033 inch (0.8 mm).
Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.
SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A.
Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-)
diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.
B.
Hanger Attachments to Concrete:
1.
Anchors: Capable of sustaining a load equal to 5 times that imposed as determined by
ASTM E 488.
C.
Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch (4.12 mm)
in diameter.
D.
Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch (25 by 5 mm) by length indicated.
E.
Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.053
inch (1.34 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092200 - 2
2.4
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and
other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply
to framing installation.
Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063
that apply to framing installation.
Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 844
that apply to framing installation.
Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply
to framing installation.
B.
Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim,
grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
C.
Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
D.
Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing
members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
3.2
INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A.
Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than
spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
B.
Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior
walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
C.
Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
D.
Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural
supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to
terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above
ceiling.
1.
2.
Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to
produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished
assemblies.
Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames;
install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092200 - 3
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required
for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to
match framing required above door heads.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated
assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to
underside of solid structure.
a.
E.
3.3
Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistancerated assembly indicated.
Direct Furring:
1.
2.
F.
Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.
Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch
(13-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in
finished assembly.
Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead
structure.
Screw to wood framing.
Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment,
or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.
Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than
1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A.
Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than
spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
B.
Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by
building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
C.
Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:
1.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with locations of hangers, install supplemental suspension
members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.
Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts
that extend through forms.
Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.
Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092200 - 4
D.
Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3
mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely
between parallel members that will receive finishes.
END OF SECTION 092216
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092200 - 5
SECTION 092400 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals: Product Data and finish Samples.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
STC-Rated Assemblies: Where indicated, provide gypsum plaster assemblies tested for STC
ratings per ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified testing agency.
B.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Where indicated, provide gypsum plaster assemblies tested
for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with
appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
2.2
LATH
A.
2.3
Expanded-Metal Lath: ASTM C 847, galvanized, flat or self-furring as indicated, 2.5-lb/sq. yd.
(1.4-kg/sq. m) weight.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Comply with ASTM C 1063 and coordinate depth of accessories with thicknesses and number
of plaster coats required:
1.
Plastic Trim: Fabricated from high-impact PVC.
a.
b.
c.
Cornerbeads: Small-nose style, with perforated flanges.
Casing Beads: Square-edge style, with perforated flanges.
Control Joints: One-piece-type, with perforated flanges and protective tape on
plaster face.
B.
Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch (13 mm) long,
free of contaminants, manufactured for use in portland cement plaster.
C.
Bonding Compound: ASTM C 932.
D.
Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: Complying with ASTM C 1063.
E.
Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing).
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
092400 - 1
F.
2.4
Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
A.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
1.
B.
Color for Finish Coats: Gray.
Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91, Type N.
1.
Color for Finish Coats: Gray.
C.
Plastic Cement: ASTM C 1328.
D.
Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S; ASTM C 207, Type S.
E.
Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897.
2.5
PLASTER MIXES
A.
Base-Coat Mix: Portland cement and lime; comply with ASTM C 926.
B.
Job-Mixed Finish Coat: Portland cement and lime; comply with ASTM C 926.
C.
Factory-Prepared Finish-Coat Mixes:
manufacturer's written instructions.
For ready-mixed finish-coat plasters; comply with
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Install components according to requirements for design
designations from listing organization and publication indicated on Drawings.
B.
Install metal lath and accessories according to ASTM C 1063.
1.
Install lath-type, external-corner reinforcement at exterior locations.
2.
Install cornerbead at interior and exterior locations.
C.
Apply bonding compound on unit masonry and concrete plaster bases.
D.
Apply, and cure plaster materials and finishes to comply with ASTM C 926. Apply two coats.
Apply float finish.
END OF SECTION 092400
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
092400 - 2
SECTION 093000 - TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals: Product Data and Samples.
B.
Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run for each contiguous area
C.
Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact
until time of use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CERAMIC TILE
A.
Ceramic tile that complies with Standard grade requirements in ANSI A137.1, "Specifications
for Ceramic Tile."
B.
Porcelain Tile: Unglazed, porcelain paver tile.
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product of one
of the following:
a.
American Olean; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc.
b.
Crossville, Inc.
c.
Daltile; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc.
d.
Florida Tile Industries, Inc.
C.
Glazed Tile: Glazed wall tile.
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product of one
of the following:
a.
American Olean; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc.
b.
Daltile; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc.
c.
Florida Tile Industries, Inc.
2.
Mounting: Pregrouted sheets of tiles factory assembled and grouted with manufacturer's
standard white silicone rubber.
3.
Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where
applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows,
selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:
a.
Base for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Coved.
b.
Wainscot Cap for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose.
c.
External Corners for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose.
d.
Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners. For coved base and cap use angle
pieces designed to fit with stretcher shapes.
TILING
093000 - 1
2.2
STONE THRESHOLDS
A.
Stone Threshold Type:
1.
Stone Type: Marble, complying with ASTM C 503, Classification I, Calcite.
2.
Color: Gray.
3.
4.
2.3
Finish: Honed.
Fabricate thresholds to be not more than 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) above adjoining finished
floor surfaces, with transition edges beveled on a slope of no greater than 1:2.
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C 1325, 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick.
B.
Fiber-Cement Underlayment: ASTM C 1288, 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick.
C.
Low-Emitting Materials: Adhesives and fluid-applied waterproofing membranes shall comply
with Green Seal's GS-36 and with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
D.
Setting and Grouting Materials: Comply with material standards in ANSI's "Specifications for
the Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to materials and methods indicated.
1.
Thin-Set Mortar Type: Latex-portland cement.
2.
Grout Type: Polymer modified.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods
specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications
for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods, specified in
tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.
1.
For installations indicated below, follow procedures in ANSI's "Specifications for the
Installation of Ceramic Tile" for providing 95 percent mortar coverage.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
B.
TILING
Exterior tile floors.
Tile floors in wet areas.
Tile swimming pool decks.
Tile floors in laundries.
Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches (200 by 200 mm) or larger.
Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles.
Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges
of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to
093000 - 2
electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap
tile.
C.
Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Align joints where adjoining tiles on floor,
base, walls, and trim are the same size.
D.
Install cementitious backer units and fiber-cement underlayment and treat joints according to
ANSI A108.11.
E.
Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar
bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot (1:50) toward drains.
F.
Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13.
G.
Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to
determine that it is watertight.
H.
Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless otherwise indicated.
At locations where mortar bed (thickset) would otherwise be exposed above adjacent floor
finishes, set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar (thin set).
I.
Apply sealer to cleaned stone tile flooring according to sealer manufacturer's written
instructions.
J.
Interior Floor Tile Installation Method(s):
1.
K.
Over Concrete Subfloors: TCA F113 (thin-set mortar) .
Interior Wall Tile Installation Method(s):
1.
Over Metal Studs or Furring: TCA W243 (thin-set mortar on gypsum board).
END OF SECTION 093000
TILING
093000 - 3
SECTION 095123 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating acoustical panel ceiling installation
with hanger attachment to building structure and ceiling mounted items:
C.
Samples: For each exposed finish.
D.
Product test reports.
E.
Research/evaluation reports.
F.
Maintenance data.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory or an NVLAPaccredited laboratory.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
1.
Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings
identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or
another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
a.
2.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Acoustical panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for
Class A materials, when tested per ASTM E 84.
a.
1.4
Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
095123 - 1
1.
2.
Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.
Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0
percent of quantity installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS, GENERAL
A.
Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264.
B.
Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635.
C.
Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,
"Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.
1.
D.
Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1
zinc coating, soft temper.
1.
E.
2.2
Anchors in Concrete: Expansion anchors fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials,
with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain,
without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a
qualified testing and inspecting agency.
Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635,
Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than
0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire.
Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's
standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements;
formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of
suspension system runners.
ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong; Dune
or a comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
USG Interiors, Inc
Chicago Metallic Corporation
B.
Classification: Provide fire-resistance-rated panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type and
form as follows:
1.
Type and Form: Type IV, mineral base with membrane-faced overlay; Form 2, water
felted; Pattern E
C.
Color: White
D.
LR: Not less than 0.80.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
095123 - 2
E.
NRC: Not less than 0.50, Type E-400 mounting per ASTM E 795.
F.
CAC: Not less than 33.
G.
Edge/Joint Detail: Tegular
H.
Thickness: 5/8 inch (16 mm)
I.
Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm)
2.3
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING
A.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong World
Industries, Inc.; Prelude ML 15/16” Exposed Tee or a comparable product by one of the
following:
1.
2.
USG Interiors, Inc
Chicago Metallic Corporation
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders.
B.
Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members, plumb and free from contact with
insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers only where required to miss
obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally
effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces
hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers, use trapezes or equivalent devices.
When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install
carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.
1.
Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck; anchor into
concrete slabs/steel joists.
C.
Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and
where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. Screw attach moldings to substrate at
intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends,
leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m).
Miter corners accurately and connect securely.
D.
Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another.
Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
095123 - 3
E.
Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system
runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat,
precise fit.
END OF SECTION 095123
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
095123 - 4
SECTION 096500 - RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals: Product Data and Samples.
B.
Extra Materials:
1.
2.
Resilient Wall Base: Deliver to Owner at least 24 linear feet of each type and color of
resilient wall base installed.
Resilient Floor Tile: Deliver to Owner one box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of
each type and color of resilient floor tile installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
RESILIENT BASE
A.
Basis of Design Product: Johnsonite Millwork Resilient Wall Base.
B.
Color and Pattern: As noted on the drawings.
C.
ASTM F 1861, Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic), Group 1.
D.
Style: Millwork Resilient Wall Base profiles to replicate the look of finely milled wood.
E.
Minimum Thickness: 0.375 inch.
F.
Height: 6 inches.
G.
Lengths: Cut lengths 8 foot long.
H.
Corners: Job formed or preformed.
I.
Finish: Matte.
2.2
STATIC DISSIPATIVE VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE
A.
Color and Pattern: As noted on the drawings.
B.
ASTM F 1066, Class 2 (through-pattern tile).
C.
Fire-Test Response: Critical radiant flux classification of Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm
per ASTM E 648.
RESILIENT FLOORING
096500 - 1
D.
Wearing Surface: Smooth.
E.
Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).
F.
Size: 12 by 12 inches (304.8 by 304.8 mm).
2.3
SPORTS FLOORING TILE
A.
Basis of Design Product: Johnsonite Multi-Functional and Sports Rubber TilesUnderLock™
Tile (studded back): 24″ X 24″ (61cm x 61cm) net, .250″ (6.4mm) thickness, wear layer
thickness of 0.090″ (2.3mm), 8.5 lbs (3.9kgs) per tile, 34 lbs (15.4 kgs) per carton,4 tiles per
carton 4 ft² per tile.
B.
Tiles are manufactured of dual durometer layers composed of 100% synthetic and natural
rubber, high quality additives, and colorants to meet the performance requirements of ASTM F1344, Class 1-A and 1-B Standard Specification for Rubber Floor Tile.
1.
Abrasion Resistance: ASTM D 3389, less than 1.00 gram weight loss
2.
Hardness (ASTM D 2240): - Top layer – 85 +/- 5 Shore A Bottom layer – 70 +/- 5 Shore
A
3.
Slip Resistance (ASTM D 2047): Meets or Exceeds a static coefficient of friction of 0.8
4.
Color Heat Stability (ASTM F-1514): Less than 8.0 E
5.
Static Load Limit (ASTM F-970): Passes at 250 PSI with less than .005” residual
indentation
6.
Fire Resistance: ASTM E 648/NFPA 253 (Critical Radiant Flux) - Class 1
7.
Chemical Resistance (ASTM F 925):Passed with White vinegar (5% Acetic acid),
Rubbing alcohol (70% Isopropyl alcohol), Sodium hydroxide solution (5% NaOH),
Hydrochloric acid solution (5% HCl), Sulfuric acid solution (5% H2SO4), Household
ammonia solution (5% NH4OH), Household bleach (5.25% NaOCl), and Disinfectant
cleaner (5% active phenol).
2.4
INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement- or blended
hydraulic cement-based formulation provided or approved by flooring manufacturer for
applications indicated.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor covering and
substrate conditions indicated.
1.
2.
C.
Low-Emitting Materials: Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.
Low-Emitting Materials: Adhesives shall comply with Green Seal's GS-36 and with the
testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services'
"Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources
Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to
protect exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.
RESILIENT FLOORING
096500 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Prepare concrete substrates according to ASTM F 710 and manufacturer’s instructions. Verify
that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
B.
Unroll sheet floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting.
C.
Maintain uniformity of resilient sheet flooring direction, and match edges for color shading at
seams.
D.
Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6
inches (152 mm) away from parallel joints in substrates.
E.
Lay out tiles so tile widths at opposite edges of room are equal and are at least one-half of a tile.
F.
Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in same sequence as
manufactured and packaged. Lay tiles in basket-weave pattern with grain direction alternating
in adjacent tiles in patterns indicated.
G.
Adhesively install resilient wall base and accessories.
H.
Install wall base in maximum lengths possible. Apply to walls, columns, pilasters, casework,
and other permanent fixtures in rooms or areas where base is required.
I.
Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would otherwise be exposed.
END OF SECTION 096500
RESILIENT FLOORING
096500 - 3
SECTION 096727 - EPOXY FLAKE CHIP SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Provide labor and materials for a seamless, industrial, epoxy and vinyl flake chip surfacing
material, including surface preparation, primers, vinyl chips and aliphatic chemical resistant
urethane topcoat.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Concrete - Division 3
B. Thermal & Moisture Protection - Division 7
1.03
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND INSTALLERS
A. DiamondStone, LLC 1-888-81-STONE.
B. Manufacturer certified installation company, currently approved in writing by
DiamondStone, LLC.
1.04
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver material to job site in clean, clearly labeled containers and inspect prior to start of
job.
B. Store material in a dry, enclosed area protected from the elements. Keep temperature of
storage area between 65° and 85° F.
1.05
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Cure new concrete no less than 28 days under good conditions.
B. Owner or general contractor to hire third party testing company to perform moisture and pH
testing per ASTM F1869 or E1907.
C. Verify supply of adequate utilities, including electric, water, heat between 50° and 90° F, and
lighting (no less than 80 ft candles measured at floor surface).
D. Free work area of other trades during, and for a period of 48 hours, after floor installation.
1.06
WARRANTY
A. Submit a two year standard warranty against defects in material and workmanship upon
substantial completion of installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
EPOXY FLAKE CHIP SYSTEM
096727 - 1
A. DiamondCast Flake Chip System is a durable, decorative flooring system composed of
Diamond-Eprime, Diamond-Epoxy CC, UV resistant vinyl flake chips and a topcoat of
Polyaspartic Urethane, as manufactured by DiamondStone, LLC 1-888-81-STONE.
2.02
PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Physical Property
Result Compressive Strength
Tensile Strength
Flexural Strength
Hardness (Shore D)
Bond Strength to Concrete
Abrasion Resistance
(CS17 Wheel 1000 Cycles)
Pot Life @ 77 F
Foot Traffic @ 77° F
Full Service @ 77° F
2.03
Test Method
ASTM C-579
ASTM C-307
ASTM C-580
ASTM D-2240
ASTM D-4541
ASTM D-4060
20 minutes
8-10 hours
24 hours
9,200 psi
5,300 psi
4,000 psi
85-90
380 psi (concrete failure)
18 mg
PRODUCT MIXING
A. Mix on site with approved mix and measure apparatus to ensure a timely, accurate mix ratio.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A. Create a surface profile by means of shot blasting to adequately prepare surface.
Mechanically grind edges with hand grinders.
B. Verify that surface is dry and clean, free of oil, grease, curing compounds. Remove any
existingimproperly bonded coating.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Adhere strictly to manufacturer's current written instructions.
B. Review calcium chloride and pH test results to ensure they meet with specified product’s
allowances for moisture and pH. Otherwise consult DiamondStone, LLC for
recommendation.
C. Prime section of the prepared area by applying a coat of DiamondStone Diamond-Eprime™.
D. Patch floor.
E. Apply a notched squeegee coat of DiamondStone Diamond-Epoxy CC™ at a rate of 6 mils
or 266 square feet per gallon. Color to be chosen from manufacturer’s standard color chart.
EPOXY FLAKE CHIP SYSTEM
096727 - 2
F. Backroll floor to provide consistency.
G. Broadcast light, medium or heavy quantity of vinyl chips per customer’s request. H. Allow
floor to dry.
I.
Sweep off excess vinyl chips.
J. Scrape floor with a wide steel blade.
K. Vacuum floor.
L. Apply a topcoat of DiamondStone Polyaspartic Urethane™ at a rate of 16 mils or 100 square
feet per gallon. Color to be clear.
3.03
OPTIONAL DETAILS
A. Saw cut existing control joints. Install backer rod. Install DiamondStone Diamond-EJF™,
depth to be twice that of the width.
END OF SECTION
EPOXY FLAKE CHIP SYSTEM
096727 - 3
SECTION 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals:
1.
2.
Product Data. Include printout of MPI's "MPI Approved Products List" with product
highlighted.
Samples.
B.
Mockups: Full-coat finish Sample of each type of coating, color, and substrate, applied where
directed.
C.
Extra Materials: Deliver to Owner 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each color and type of finish coat paint used
on Project, in containers, properly labeled and sealed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PAINT
A.
MPI Standards: Provide materials that comply with MPI standards indicated and listed in its
"MPI Approved Products List."
1.
Exterior Painting Materials:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
Block Filler, Latex: MPI #4.
Primer, Alkali Resistant, Water Based: MPI #3.
Primer, Bonding, Water Based: MPI #17.
Primer, Bonding, Solvent Based: MPI #69.
Primer, Alkyd, Anticorrosive: MPI #79.
Primer, Galvanized, Water Based: MPI #134.
Primer, Quick Dry, for Aluminum: MPI #95.
Primer, Latex: MPI #6.
Primer, Alkyd: MPI #5.
Latex, Exterior Flat (Gloss Level 1): MPI #10.
Latex, Exterior Low Sheen (Gloss Level 3-4): MPI #15.
Latex, Exterior Semigloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #11.
Latex, Exterior, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #119.
Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water Based (Gloss Level 3): MPI #161.
Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water Based, Semigloss (Gloss Level 5):
MPI #163.
Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water Based, Gloss (Gloss Level 6):
MPI #164.
Alkyd, Exterior Flat (Gloss Level 1): MPI #8.
Alkyd, Exterior, Semigloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #94.
PAINTING AND COATING
099000 - 1
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
2.
Interior Painting Materials:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
x.
y.
z.
aa.
bb.
3.
Alkyd, Exterior Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #9.
Alkyd, Quick Dry, Semigloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #81.
Alkyd, Quick Dry, Gloss (Gloss Level 7): MPI #96.
Floor Paint, Latex, Low Gloss (Maximum Gloss Level 3): MPI #60.
Floor Enamel, Alkyd, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #27.
Block Filler, Latex: MPI #4.
Primer Sealer, Latex: MPI #50.
Primer, Alkali Resistant, Water Based: MPI #3.
Primer Sealer, Institutional Low Odor/VOC: MPI #149.
Primer, Latex, for Interior Wood: MPI #39.
Primer Sealer, Alkyd, Interior: MPI #45.
Primer, Bonding, Water Based: MPI #17.
Primer, Bonding, Solvent Based: MPI #69.
Primer, Alkyd, Anticorrosive: MPI #79.
Primer, Galvanized, Water Based: MPI #134.
Primer, Quick Dry, for Aluminum: MPI #95.
Latex, Interior, Flat, (Gloss Level 1): MPI #53.
Latex, Interior, (Gloss Level 2): MPI #44.
Latex, Interior, (Gloss Level 4): MPI #43.
Latex, Interior, Semigloss, (Gloss Level 5): MPI #54.
Latex, Interior, Gloss, (Gloss Level 6, except Minimum Gloss of 65 Units at 60
Degrees): MPI #114.
Latex, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Flat (Gloss Level 1): MPI #143.
Latex, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 2): MPI #144.
Latex, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Semigloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #147.
Latex, High Performance Architectural, (Gloss Level 2): MPI #138.
Latex, High Performance Architectural, Semigloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #141.
Alkyd, Interior, Flat (Gloss Level 1): MPI #49.
Alkyd, Interior, Semigloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #47.
Alkyd, Interior, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #48.
Alkyd, Quick Dry, Semigloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #81.
Alkyd, Quick Dry, Gloss (Gloss Level 7): MPI #96.
Floor Paint, Latex, Low Gloss (Maximum Gloss Level 3): MPI #60.
Floor Enamel, Alkyd, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #27.
Staining and Clear Finishing Materials:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
Wood Filler Paste: MPI #91.
Primer, Latex for Exterior Wood: MPI #6.
Primer, Alkyd for Exterior Wood: MPI #5.
Primer, Oil for Exterior Wood: MPI #7.
Preservative, for Exterior Wood: MPI #37.
Alkyd, Sanding Sealer, Clear: MPI #102.
Shellac: MPI #88.
Stain, Exterior, Water Based, Solid Hide: MPI #16.
Stain, Exterior, Solvent Based, Solid Hide: MPI #14.
Stain, Exterior, Solvent Based, Semitransparent: MPI #13.
Stain, for Exterior Wood Decks: MPI #33.
PAINTING AND COATING
099000 - 2
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
x.
y.
z.
4.
High-Performance Coating Materials:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
B.
Stain, Semitransparent, for Interior Wood: MPI #90.
Varnish, Water Based, Clear, Satin (Gloss Level 4): MPI #128.
Varnish, Water Based, Clear, Semigloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #129.
Varnish, Water Based, Clear, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #130.
Varnish, with UV Inhibitor, Exterior, Semigloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #30.
Varnish, with UV Inhibitor, Exterior, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #29.
Varnish, Marine Spar, Exterior, Gloss (Gloss Level 7): MPI #28.
Varnish, Interior, Flat (Gloss Level 1): MPI #73.
Varnish, Interior, Semigloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #74.
Varnish, Interior, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #75.
Varnish, Interior, Polyurethane, Oil-Modified, Satin (Gloss Level 4): MPI #57.
Varnish, Interior, Polyurethane, Oil-Modified, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #56.
Varnish, Polyurethane, Moisture-Cured, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #31.
Varnish, Aliphatic Polyurethane, Two-Component (Gloss Level 6 or 7): MPI #78.
Danish Oil: MPI #92.
Block Filler, Latex: MPI #4.
Block Filler, Epoxy: MPI #116.
Primer Sealer, Latex: MPI #50.
Primer, Zinc-Rich, Epoxy: MPI #20.
Primer, Epoxy, Anticorrosive: MPI #101.
Epoxy, Gloss: MPI #77.
Epoxy-Modified Latex, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #115.
Epoxy Deck Coating (Slip Resistant): MPI #82.
Polyurethane, Two-Component, Pigmented, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #72.
Material Compatibility:
substrates.
1.
Provide materials that are compatible with one another and with
For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
C.
Use paints and coatings that comply with VOC content outlined in Section 18113 Sustainable
Design Requriements.
D.
Colors: As selected.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Comply with recommendations in MPI's "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual"
applicable to substrates indicated.
B.
Remove hardware, lighting fixtures, and similar items that are not to be painted. Mask items
that cannot be removed. Reinstall items in each area after painting is complete.
PAINTING AND COATING
099000 - 3
C.
3.2
Clean and prepare surfaces in an area before beginning painting in that area. Schedule painting
so cleaning operations will not damage newly painted surfaces.
APPLICATION
A.
Comply with recommendations in MPI's "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual"
applicable to substrates indicated.
B.
Paint exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
D.
3.3
Use brushes only for exterior painting and where the use of other applicators is not
practical.
Use rollers for finish coat on interior walls and ceilings.
Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
1.
E.
Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.
Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
Paint the back side of access panels.
Color-code mechanical piping in accessible ceiling spaces.
Do not paint prefinished items, items with an integral finish, operating parts, and labels
unless otherwise indicated.
If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured
film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
Apply stains and transparent finishes to produce surface films without color irregularity,
cloudiness, holidays, lap marks, brush marks, runs, ropiness, or other imperfections. Use
multiple coats to produce a smooth surface film of even luster.
EXTERIOR PAINT APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A.
Concrete, Nontraffic Surfaces:
1.
B.
Steel:
1.
C.
Semigloss Water-Based, Light-Industrial Coating: Two coats over alkyd anticorrosive
primer.
Galvanized Metal:
1.
D.
Low-Sheen Latex: Two coats over primer: MPI EXT 3.1A.
Semigloss Latex: Two coats over waterborne galvanized-metal primer: MPI EXT 5.3H.
Stucco:
PAINTING AND COATING
099000 - 4
1.
E.
Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board:
1.
3.4
Low-Sheen Latex: Two coats: MPI EXT 9.1A.
Low-Sheen Latex: Two coats: MPI EXT 9.2A.
INTERIOR PAINT APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A.
Steel:
1.
Semigloss High-Performance Architectural Latex: Two coats over alkyd anticorrosive
primer: MPI INT 5.1R.
B.
Concrete Masonry Units:
1.
C.
Semigloss Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex: Two coats over waterborne galvanizedmetal primer: MPI INT 5.3J.
Gypsum Board:
1.
3.5
Two coats over latex block filler:
Galvanized Metal:
1.
D.
Semigloss Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex:
MPI INT 4.2A.
Semigloss Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex:
primer/sealer: MPI INT 9.2M.
Two coats over low-odor/VOC
INTERIOR STAIN AND CLEAR FINISH APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A.
Wood substrates, nontraffic surfaces, including doors.
1.
Satin Oil-Modified Polyurethane Varnish over Stain:
MPI INT 6.1J.
Two coats over stain:
END OF SECTION 099000
PAINTING AND COATING
099000 - 5
SECTION 101400 - SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals: Product Data, Shop Drawings, and Samples.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SIGNS, GENERAL
A.
2.2
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines.
DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNS
A.
Manufacturers:
B.
Dimensional Characters: Cast-aluminum characters.
1.
2.3
Finish and Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
PANEL SIGNS
A.
Interior Panel Signs: Reverse silk-screened clear acrylic with opaque background with beveled
edges and square corners.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Exterior Framed Panel Signs: Extruded-aluminum frames with translucent acrylic panels and
matte-finished opaque acrylic characters chemically welded to faces of panels.
1.
2.4
Finishes and Colors: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
Tactile Characters: Characters and Grade 2 Braille raised 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) above
surface with contrasting colors.
Provide signs for all rooms mounted on the wall beside the room door: .
Finishes and Colors: As noted on the drawings.
MATERIALS
A.
Aluminum Castings: Alloy recommended by sign manufacturer for casting process used and
for use and finish indicated.
SIGNAGE
101400 - 1
B.
Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper recommended by
aluminum producer and finisher, with not less than the strength and durability of 5005-H15.
C.
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy and temper recommended by
aluminum producer and finisher, with not less than the strength and durability properties of
6063-T5.
D.
Bronze Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS C83600 (No. 1 manganese bronze).
E.
Bronze Plate: ASTM B 36/B 36M, alloy UNS No. C28000 (muntz metal).
F.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.
G.
Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), Type UVA (UV absorbing).
H.
Plastic Laminate: High-pressure laminate engraving stock with face and core in contrasting
colors.
I.
Applied Vinyl: Die-cut characters from vinyl film of nominal thickness of 3 mils (0.076 mm)
with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing, suitable for exterior applications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Locate signs where indicated or directed by Architect. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights
indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion and other defects in appearance.
B.
Wall-Mounted Signs:
1.
Silicone-Adhesive Mounting:
surfaces.
C.
Attach signs to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered
Dimensional Characters: Mount characters with backs in contact with wall surface.
END OF SECTION 101400
SIGNAGE
101400 - 2
SECTION 101453 - TRAFFIC SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Signage indicated on the Drawings and specified in this section.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.2
Section 32 12 16 – Asphalt Paving.
REFERENCES
A.
Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices, U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway
Administration.
B.
Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT) Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction. (Latest Edition)
C.
City of Miami and Miami-Dade County Public Works Department Standards and Specifications
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit properly identified manufacturer's literature and technical data before commencing work.
1.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for review, indicating construction details, sizes,
elevations, installation requirements, gauges, thickness of materials, color and other
information necessary to show compliance with the requirements of this section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Sign Panels:
1.
2.
B.
Aluminum or galvanized steel in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section
700 "Highway Signing" of the FDOT Specifications or Standard Road Details of the
DCPW Manual.
Size, shape and color as indicated on the drawings or the above mentioned Standards and
Specifications.
Sign Support Posts:
1.
Aluminum or galvanized steel in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section
700 "Highway Signing" of the FDOT Specifications or DCPW Manual.
2.
Size, shape and color of posts and mountings as indicated on drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
TRAFFIC SIGNAGE
101453 - 1
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
3.2
Do not proceed with the work of this Section until conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion of the work have been corrected in an acceptable manner.
INSTALLATION
A.
Sign Panels:
1.
Install in Accordance with Applicable Requirements of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
Section 700 "Highway Signing" of FDOT Specifications.
Standard Road Detail of the MDCPW Manual.
Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices.
Accepted shop drawings and as indicated on drawings.
Sign Supports:
1.
Install in accordance with applicable requirements of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Section 700 "Highway Signing" of FDOT Specifications.
Standard Road Detail of the MDCPW Manual.
Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices.
Accepted shop drawings and as indicated on drawings.
END OF SECTION
TRAFFIC SIGNAGE
101453 - 2
SECTION 102113 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals: Product Data, Shop Drawings, and Samples.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
TOILET COMPARTMENTS AND SCREENS
A.
2.2
Accessibility Requirements: Comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers
Compliance Board's Accessibility Guidelines for toilet compartments designated as accessible.
MATERIALS
A.
Solid-Plastic, Phenolic Core: Solid phenolic core with melamine facing fused to both sides,
without visible glue line or seam, with eased edges and with minimum 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick
doors and pilasters and minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick panels and screens.
1.
2.
Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less per ASTM E 84.
Color: As indicated on drawings.
B.
Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Stainless steel ASTM A666, Type 304, No. 3 or No. 4
directional polish, not less than 3 inches (75 mm) high.
C.
Brackets: Continuous.
1.
2.3
Material: Stainless steel A666, Type 304, No. 3 or No. 4 directional polish.
FABRICATION
A.
Toilet Compartments: Overhead braced and floor anchored.
B.
Urinal Screens: Wall hung.
C.
Metal Units: Internally reinforce metal panels for hardware, accessories, and grab bars.
D.
Solid-Polymer Units: Provide aluminum heat-sink strips at exposed bottom edges of panels and
doors.
E.
Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide in-swinging doors for standard
toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
102113 - 1
inch- (813-mm-) wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be accessible to people with
disabilities.
F.
Door Hardware: Stainless steel. Provide units that comply with accessibility requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction at compartments indicated to be accessible to people with
disabilities.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Hinges: Continuous, self-closing type, adjustable to hold door open at any angle up to 90
degrees.
Latches and Keepers: Recessed unit designed for emergency access and with
combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper.
Coat Hook: Combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent door from
hitting compartment-mounted accessories.
Door Bumper: Rubber-tipped bumpers at out-swinging doors or entrance screen doors.
Door Pull: Provide at out-swinging doors. Provide units on both sides of doors at
compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb, with not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) between
pilasters and panels and not more than 1 inch (25 mm) between panels and walls. Provide
brackets, pilaster shoes, bracing, and other components required for a complete installation.
Use theft-resistant exposed fasteners finished to match hardware. Use sleeve nuts for throughbolt applications.
1.
Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from closed
position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors and swing doors in entrance
screens to return to fully closed position.
END OF SECTION 102113
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
102113 - 2
SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
Work specified under this Section covers all earthwork required to construct roads, driveways,
parking areas, curbs and sidewalks including excavation, fill and embankment, stabilizing subgrade
under paving, excavation for trenching and backfilling for any site utilities, complete.
B.
Existing and finish grade contours and elevations shown on the Contract Drawings indicate the
areas requiring precise earthwork operations under this Contract and the elevations to which
earthwork within these areas is to be constructed.
1.2
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
Laboratory tests to determine moisture density relations of soils: AASHTO T-180.
B.
In place density of compacted base course: ASTM D-1557.
C.
Geotechnical reports prepared for the project and available from the Architect/ Engineer for
information only.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The Contractor shall be responsible for layout, and establishing and setting all grade elevations.
The Contractor shall carefully maintain all bench marks, monuments and other reference points.
Should such be damaged, he shall replace such using a registered surveyor at the Contractor's
expense.
B.
Density tests to check compaction required under this Section will be made by a recognized testing
laboratory approved by the Owner. If tests indicate that further compaction work is necessary to
meet the criteria, further density tests shall be made as directed by the Architect/Engineer and paid
for by the Contractor.
1.4
PROTECTION
A.
The Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to protect adjoining premises and property,
including existing buildings, adjacent sidewalks, curbs, roads, planters, and all live trees, shrubs
and bushes in the vicinity of the Contract operations and assume full responsibility for any damage
resulting from neglect of such or any accidents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT
A.
Areas Under Pavement and Walkways: Material to be used for embankment specified under this
Section shall be clear sharp coarse sand or screenings conforming to Section 902-4 or 902-5 of the
EARTH MOVING
312000 - 1
Florida Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction
(Latest Edition).
B.
2.2
A.
2.3
A.
Landscaped Areas (or Other Areas Beyond Paving and/or Buildings Limits): Any suitable material
taken from excavation may be used in any of these areas. Suitable material is defined as clear,
sharp sand or sand and limerock mixture with a minimum of 60 percent sand. Material shall not
contain more than 3.0 percent of organic matter or more than 5.0 percent of plastic materials.
ON-SITE BORROW
On-site borrow of suitable embankment material will not be permitted. Should there be a
deficiency of suitable embankment material of any type to meet the contract grading requirements,
the Contractor shall supplement such deficiency from off-site sources.
TOPSOIL
Strip all topsoil from all paved areas and stockpile this material for future use around the site.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
3.3
A.
HAUL ROUTES
Hauling of material to areas requiring embankment shall be made only along routes approved by
the Architect/Engineer. Contractor shall obtain all necessary regulatory permits for hauling. The
Contractor shall make reasonable efforts not to damage existing paving, walks or other areas within
the limits of construction or along haul routes. If, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, such
areas are damaged due to Contractor's negligence, carelessness, or use of haul routes other than
approved, the Contractor shall be responsible for the restoration of such areas at no expense to the
Owner prior to the termination of this contract. Within site areas requiring embankment, the
Contractor shall make reasonable efforts to avoid continuous equipment traffic over embankment
not requiring compaction. The Contractor shall cooperate in attempting to route continuous
equipment traffic within areas designated by the Architect/Engineer. Fuels for equipment used in
earthwork operations shall not be stored on the site. Major repairs to equipment shall not be
performed on the site.
SUBSURFACE SOIL DATA
Subsurface soil investigations have been made at the site and the boring logs and their locations are
available for inspection at the Owner’s office. Neither the Owner nor the Architect/Engineer
guarantee that these borings indicate actual conditions other than at the exact locations and time
they were made. Water levels indicated are also not guaranteed, since ground water levels are
known to fluctuate depending on weather and runoff. No claim for extra compensation or for
extension of time will be allowed because of subsurface conditions different than boring data
indicated.
STRIPPING OF TOPSOIL
Existing topsoil shall be stripped to its entire depth (6" minimum) from areas to be occupied by
paving, sidewalks or other structures and stockpiled for re-use in final grading work.
EARTH MOVING
312000 - 2
3.4
PAVED AREAS
A.
Excavation: This work consists of excavation, where required, and satisfactory disposal of the
resultant materials for the construction of pavements, curbs, sidewalk, etc. The outer limits of
paving, shall be brought to a surface conforming to the grades, lines, and cross sections shown or
indicated on the Drawings, ready to receive the base of paving course.
B.
Pavement Subgrade Preparation: All soft and yielding material and other portions of the subgrade
which will not compact readily shall be removed and replaced with acceptable material and the
whole subgrade then compacted, by means of a 3-wheel, ten ton roller and/or sheepsfoot roller, or
such other compaction equipment necessary to obtain densities as hereinafter specified. The upper
12 inches under vehicular paving shall be stabilized by adding crushed limerock or limerock
screenings in sufficient quantity to produce a limerock bearing ratio of not less than 40.
Where muck or other material unsuitable for paving foundation purposes is found within the limits
of work, the Contractor shall excavate such material down to a suitable foundation material as
directed by the Architect/Engineer. After the removal of the unsuitable material the resulting
excavation shall be backfilled with suitable material which shall be shaped to conform to cross
sections and details shown on Drawings, and properly compacted, as specified elsewhere herein.
After all unsatisfactory conditions found in the subgrade have been corrected, the subgrade shall be
shaped and rolled. Rolling shall be done with a 3-wheel roller weighing not less than ten tons or
such other equipment as found necessary for obtaining specified densities, and continued as long as
is necessary to bring the surface of the subgrade to an acceptable uniform density or bearing value.
After compaction, the finished subgrade shall conform to the drawing requirements.
C.
Embankment: This work consists of furnishing and placing the materials required for
embankment:
Materials used for embankment shall be suitable material as herein above specified and shall meet
with acceptance of the Engineer. In no case shall stumps, roots, brush, vegetation, mulch or other
unsuitable material be left in place under paving or walks.
Before placing the first layer of any embankment, the surface receiving the embankment shall be
plowed or scarified. Embankment shall be placed in successive layers of not more than eight
inches in thickness, measured loose, for the full width of the cross section.
Exercise care to insure that all voids are filled. All traffic over paved areas during the construction
of an embankment to be so distributed as to cover the entire layer.
Each eight inch layer to be thoroughly compacted with a 3-wheel, ten ton roller, or such equipment
found necessary to obtain the specified density, and the surface lightly scarified after rolling before
placing the succeeding eight inch (8") layer.
Compaction: All embankment and upper 12 inches of stabilized subgrade under roads and
walkways, shall be compacted to not less than 95 percent of maximum density at optimum
moisture. Compaction and densities will be determined as specified elsewhere herein.
EARTH MOVING
312000 - 3
3.5
TESTING
A.
The following tests shall be made by the Owner:
1.
or
2.
3.6
Laboratory Maximum Density Determinations (AASHTO T-180) Modified Standard Proctor
Control Method: One representative test made from each source of embankment material to
be used by the Contractor. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the optimum moisture content
maximum density of these samples are reasonably uniform, the laboratory maximum density
will be established as the average of the sample densities. If the densities are not reasonably
uniform, additional tests may be required and specific maximum densities established.
In-Place Field Density Tests (ASTM D-1557): Tests shall be made in each layer before the
subsequent layer is placed; one test per layer for each 5,000 square feet of embankment area
or fraction thereof. Tests to be made near the bottom of each layer.
ADDITIONAL TESTS
A.
3.7
Additional tests will be required for each test that fails to meet the specified density. All tests for
moisture content and for density including additional tests, if initial tests fail, will be at the
Contractor's expense.
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
3.8
Embankment material may be inspected at any stage of operation to determine its compaction
characteristics and its ability to meet the requirements herein specified. The Contractor shall notify
the Architect/Engineer of the location of the embankment source so that inspection and/or testing
can be made 15 days prior to delivery to site. This paragraph also applies to fill material.
EXCAVATION, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING FOR UTILITIES SYSTEMS
A.
General Requirements: Excavation shall include excavation of every description and of whatever
substances encountered and to the depths or elevations indicated or specified. Excavation,
trenching and backfilling for all utility systems shall extend to the point of connection with the
building utility lines of the building served.
B.
Excavation:
Place materials suitable for backfilling a sufficient distance from banks of trenches to prevent slides
or cave-ins. Place excavated materials on one side only of trenches in such manner as to permit
ready access to and use of existing fire wells and/or hydrants, valves, manholes and other utilities
system appurtenances. Keep surface drainage of adjoining areas unobstructed. Excavated
materials not required or not suitable for backfill to be hauled to disposal areas. Remove water by
pumping or other approved method and discharge at a safe distance from excavation.
Trench Excavation: Trenches to be of necessary width for proper laying of pipe, duct, or cable,
and banks to be as nearly vertical as practical. Avoid open trenches for prolonged periods.
Bottoms of trenches to be accurately graded to provide uniform bearing and support for each
section of pipe on undisturbed soil or compacted fill at every point along its entire length, except
for portions of pipe sections where it is necessary to excavate for proper making of pipe joints.
EARTH MOVING
312000 - 4
Depressions for joints to be dug after trench bottom has been graded.
At option of the Contractor, and as approved, trench may be cut to an over depth of not less than 4
inches and backfilled to a required grade for bedding with select backfill material to be backfilled
to at least mid-point of pipe. When unsatisfactory soil incapable of properly supporting pipe is
encountered in bottom of trench, remove such soil to depth required for proper support or as
directed by Architect/Engineer. Over-depth in unstable soil excavation and unauthorized overdepths to be backfilled to proper grade with select backfill material as hereinbefore specified or
with satisfactory material as approved by the Architect/Engineer and to be thoroughly tamped.
Backfilling of unauthorized over-depths to be at the expense of the Contractor. Special
requirement relating to specific utilities are as follows:
Gravity sanitary sewers: Widths of trenches at and below top of pipe to be such as to provide
adequate space for workmen to place and joint pipe properly, but clear space between barrel of pipe
and trench wall not to exceed 12 inches on either side of pipe. Width of trench above that level
may be as wide as necessary for sheeting and bracing and proper performance of work. Bottom of
trench to be rounded so at least the bottom quadrant of pipe shall rest firmly on undisturbed soil, or
select backfill for as nearly the full length of barrel as proper jointing operations will permit. This
part of excavation to be done manually, only a few feet in advance of pipe laying, by persons
skilled in this type work.
C.
Excavating for appurtenances: Excavating for manholes, and similar structures shall be sufficient
to leave at least 12 inches in the clear between their outer surfaces and the embankment of shoring
which may be used. Whenever unstable soil incapable of properly supporting the structure is
encountered in the bottom of excavation, remove such soil to the depth necessary to obtain proper
bearing. Unauthorized over-depths or over-depths in wet or otherwise unstable soil to be filled
with select backfill material or concrete as directed, at expense of Contractor.
D.
Protection or removal of utility lines: Locations of existing utility lines which are made known to
the Contractor prior to excavating and trenching and that are to be retained, as well as utility lines
constructed during excavating and trenching operations, shall be protected from damage during
excavating, trenching and backfilling and, if damaged, to be repaired by Contractor at his expense.
When utility lines that are to be removed, are encountered within area of operations, Contractor
shall issue notices in ample time for necessary measures to be taken to prevent interruption of
service.
Coordination: The Contractor, before beginning construction, shall ascertain from the utility
companies, Owner’s representatives and Architect/Engineer, the location of all underground lines
in the excavation area. Any existing utility lines damaged during excavating to be repaired by
Contractor at his expense.
Pavement removal and replacement: Where it is necessary to cut existing pavement, curbs, and
gutters, Contractor shall make cut with neat, parallel, straight lines. Cut to be made at least 1 foot
wider than trench on each side of trench. Replace pavement, curbs, and gutters to same cross
section as original, using the same materials as in original construction. No pavement to be
replaced until trench has been backfilled as specified herein.
E.
Backfilling and Compaction:
Suitable Material: Suitable utility trench backfill material to be sand or other non-cohesive, non-
EARTH MOVING
312000 - 5
plastic, granular and permeable material. Backfill material shall meet with acceptance of the
Engineer.
Trench Backfill: Trenches shall not be backfilled until all required tests are performed and
permission to proceed with the backfilling has been given by the Engineer.
Trench Construction: Backfill to be placed under and around the utility in layers not exceeding 6
inch loose thickness, and compacted to a minimum of 85 percent of maximum density at optimum
moisture as determined by AASHTO Specification T-180. Compaction for cast-iron, steel or
wrought iron pipe to be by hand or mechanical means provided that care is taken to avoid damage
to pipe or pipe coatings. From 1 foot above pipe barrel to grade the remaining backfill shall be
placed in layers not exceeding 12 inches in loose thickness and compacted. Backfill material to
contain no clods, lumps of earth, stones or rocks too large to pass through a 3/4 inch diameter ring.
Final density shall provide a density equal to that of the existing or specified adjacent area. All
trenches to be solid sodded after completion of backfill.
Backfill Within Paved Areas: Where the trench is in an area which will be paved, the procedure
specified above for backfill from 1 foot above the pipe barrel is modified as follows: After the
backfill has been placed to within 1 foot above the pipe barrel and compacted, the remaining
backfill to be placed in uniform layers not exceeding 9 inches loose thickness and compacted to 95
percent of maximum density at optimum moisture as determined by AASHTO Specification T-180.
Compaction in layers to be carried up to the subgrade bottom. The remaining backfill shall be
compacted to provide the limerock bearing ratio hereinabove specified.
F.
Sheeting and Bracing: The Contractor shall provide all sheeting, bracing, or shoring necessary to
support the sides of excavations required for safety and/or to prevent any earth movements which
could diminish the width of the excavation or injure the utility. All sheeting and bracing shall be
removed in such a manner as not to endanger the utility structures or property. All voids left, or
caused by the withdrawal of sheeting shall be immediately refilled with sand by compacting tools
adapted for that purpose, by watering, or as otherwise directed. The Contractor shall not be
relieved from liability for damages to persons or property resulting from failure to install sufficient
sheeting and bracing to prevent any caving or moving of the ground adjacent to the bank of the
trench. No additional compensation will be made for sheeting or bracing that may be required.
Sheeting or bracing shall not be left in place.
G.
Dewatering: Water shall not be allowed in trenches while pipes are being placed. Where
dewatering is required, and/or performed, the use of modern and efficient methods will be required.
The Contractor shall not open up more trench than the available pumping facilities are able to
dewater. Contractor to assume full responsibility for disposing of all water to avoid injury,
interference with property rights or the normal drainage in the area in which the work is taking
place. In no case shall pipe being placed be used as drains for such water, and the ends of pipe to
be kept properly and adequately blocked during construction by the use of accepted stoppers, not
be improvised equipment. All necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent the entrance of mud,
sand, animals or other obstructing matter into the pipe lines, and on completion of the work any
such material which may have entered the pipe or duct lines must be cleared out so that all the
system will be left clean and unobstructed.
Utility Structures: Backfill material to be placed in layers not more than 12 inches in thickness,
loose measure. Compaction shall be as specified above for trench backfill.
EARTH MOVING
312000 - 6
H.
Compaction Tests: All tests to be made by approved testing laboratory. Where AASHTO
Specification T-180 is required Method "D" will be used.
I.
Test for Displacement of Sewer: Sewer mains will be checked by the Architect/Engineer to
determine if any displacement of the pipe has occurred after the trench has been backfilled to 2 feet
above the pipe and compacted as specified. The test will be as follows: A light will be flashed
between manholes, or, if the manholes have not as yet been constructed, between the locations of
the manholes, by means of a flashlight or by reflecting sunlight with a mirror. If the illuminated
interior of the pipe line shows poor alignment, displaced pipe, or any other defects, the defects
designated by the Architect/Engineer shall be remedied by the Contractor at no expense to the
Owner.
3.9
EXCESS MATERIAL
A.
3.10
All excavated material not needed to meet the embankment requirements, or unsuitable material,
shall become the Contractor’s property and shall be properly disposed of in an approved landfill
site.
GRASSED AND SODDED AREAS (except Embankments)
A.
Preparation of areas designated for grass and/or sod shall conform with all requirements of the
Landscape drawings and specifications.
B
Material used at grassed and sodded areas shall be suitable material as herein specified and shall
meet with the acceptance of the Architect/Engineer. In no case shall material containing stumps,
roots, brush, vegetation, or other unsuitable materials be placed under grassed and sodded areas.
C.
Any suitable material taken from areas of excavation at the site may be used under grassed and
sodded areas.
D.
After clearing and grubbing operations have been completed and before placing first layer of fill at
grassed and sodded areas, the surface to receive the fill shall be plowed in successive layers of not
more than twelve inches (12") in thickness measured loose, for full width of cross section.
E.
Each 12" layer to be thoroughly compacted with the proper equipment to obtain the specified
density. The surface shall be lightly scarified before proceeding with the next 12" lift.
F.
Fill may be loose dumped to depths of more than 12" up to one foot above the water table existing
at the time of construction.
G.
Compact each layer, 85 percent density per ASTM 1557.
3.11
A.
GRADING, FINISHING AND MAINTENANCE
All excavation and embankments to be constructed to neat construction lines. Finished grade
elevations of excavated swales within the site to be within 0.1 feet above or below the finished
grade elevations or contours shown on the drawings. The finished surface of embankments shall be
within 0.1 feet above or below finished grade contours or elevations shown on the Drawings.
EARTH MOVING
312000 - 7
END OF SECTION
EARTH MOVING
312000 - 8
SECTION 102226 - OPERABLE PARTITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals:
1.
Product Data: Material description, construction details, finishes, installation details and
operating instructions for partition, components and accessories. Include test reports for
acoustical properties.
2.
Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of work including plan, elevations, sections,
details, attachments to other construction and accessories. Indicate dimensions, weights,
conditions at openings and at storage areas, and required installation, storage and
operating clearances for hardware and track, including floor tolerances required and
direction of travel. Indicate blocking to be provided by others. Show embedded items
and cutouts required in other work, including punching template.
B.
Warranty
1.
Provide written warranty by manufacturer of operable partitions agreeing to repair or
replace any components with manufacturing defects.
2.
Warranty Period: Two (2) years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
OPERABLE PANEL PARTITION
A.
Basis of Design Product: Modernfold (a DORMA Group Company) Acousti-Seal 932.
B.
Products of the following manufacturers will be considered if comparable to the Basis of Design
Product and the following specifications:
1.
FolDoor; Holcomb & Hoke Mfg. Co., Inc.
2.
Hufcor.
3.
Panelfold Inc.
C.
Partition Operation and Configuration: Manually operated, paired panels.
D.
Surface-Burning Characteristics:
E.
Panel:
1.
Nominal 3-inch (76mm) thick panels in manufacturer's standard 48-inch (1220mm)
widths. All panel horizontal and vertical framing members fabricated from minimum 18gage formed steel with overlapped and welded corners for rigidity. Top channel is
reinforced to support suspension system components. Frame is designed so that full
vertical edges of panels are of formed steel and provide concealed protection of the edges
of the panel skin.
OPERABLE PARTITIONS
102226 - 1
2.
3.
4.
5.
Panel skin shall be: Roll-formed steel wrapping around panel edge. Panel skins shall be
lock formed and welded directly to the frame for unitized construction. Acoustical ratings
of panels with this construction minimum: 45 STC per ASTM E 90 and ASTM E 413.
Hinges shall be Full leaf butt hinges, attached directly to the panel frame with welded
hinge anchor plates within panel to further support hinge mounting to frame. Lifetime
warranty on hinges. Hinges mounted into panel edge or vertical astragal are not
acceptable.
Panel Trim: No vertical trim required or allowed on edges of panels; minimal groove
appearance at panel joints.
Panel Weights: 8 lbs./square foot
F.
Panel Closure:
1.
Initial Closure: Flexible, resilient PVC, bulb-shaped acoustical seal.
2.
Final Closure: Constant-force, lever-operated mechanical closure expanding from panel
edge to create a constant-pressure acoustical seal.
G.
Panel Face Finish: Vinyl wall covering; manufacturer's standard fabric.
1.
Panel finish shall be factory applied reinforced heavy-duty vinyl with woven backing
weighing not less than 30 ounces per lineal yard.
2.
Provide finishes with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes not more than 25 and
450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
3.
Panel Trim: Exposed panel trim of one consistent color
4.
Color and Pattern: As shown on the drawings.
H.
Suspension System: #17 Suspension System
1.
1. Suspension Tracks: Minimum 11-gauge, 0.12-inch (3.04mm) roll-formed steel track,
suitable for either direct mounting to a wood header or supported by adjustable steel
hanger brackets, supporting the load-bearing surface of the track, connected to structural
support by pairs of 0.38-inch (10mm) diameter threaded rods. Aluminum track is not
acceptable.
a.
Exposed track soffit: Steel, integral to track, and pre-painted off-white.
2.
Carriers: One all-steel trolley with steel tired ball bearing wheels per panel (except
hinged panels). Non-steel tires are not acceptable.
I.
Sound seals
1.
Vertical Interlocking Sound Seals between panels: Roll-formed steel astragals, with
reversible tongue and groove configuration in each panel edge for universal panel
operation. Rigid plastic astragals or astragals in only one panel edge are not acceptable.
2.
Horizontal Top Seals: Continuous contact extruded vinyl bulb shape with pairs of noncontacting vinyl fingers to prevent distortion without the need for mechanically operated
parts.
a.
Horizontal bottom floor seals shall be Modernfold IC2 Bottom Seal. Manually
activated operable bottom seals with removable handle providing nominal 2-inch
(51mm) operating clearance with an operating range of +0.50-inch (13mm) to 1.50-inch (38mm). Seal shall be operable from panel edge or face.
OPERABLE PARTITIONS
102226 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Examine flooring, structural support, and opening, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of operable
panel partitions. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
B.
Install operable panel partitions to comply with ASTM E 557, operable partition manufacturer's
written installation instructions, Drawings and approved Shop Drawings after other finishing
operations, including painting, had been completed.
C.
Broken, cracked, chipped, deformed or unmatched panels are not acceptable.
D.
Clean partition surfaces upon completing installation of operable partitions to remove dust, dirt,
adhesives, and other foreign materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to the manufacturer and
installer that insure operable partitions are without damage or deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion.
F.
Adjust operable partitions to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free from binding, warp,
excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction,
throughout entire operational range. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.
G.
Demonstrate proper operation and maintenance procedures to Owner's representative. Provide
Operation and Maintenance Manual to Owner's representative.
END OF SECTION 102226
OPERABLE PARTITIONS
102226 - 3
SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals: Product Data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties products indicated on the drawings or a
comparable product of one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Underlavatory Guard
1.
2.
3.
2.2
A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc.
Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
Bradley Corporation.
Basis-of-Design Product: Plumberex Specialty Products Pro-Extreme or a comparable
product of one of the following:
a.
Truebro, Inc. by IPS Corporation.
Description: Insulating pipe coverings for supply and drain piping assemblies, which
prevent direct contact with and burns from piping, and allow service access without
removing coverings.
Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white.
MATERIALS
A.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, No. 4 finish (satin), 0.0312-inch (0.8-mm) minimum
nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Brass: ASTM B 19, ASTM B 16 (ASTM B 16M), or ASTM B 30.
C.
Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6 or 6463-T6.
D.
Sheet Steel: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, 0.0359-inch (0.9-mm) minimum nominal thickness.
E.
Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180).
F.
Chromium Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).
G.
Baked-Enamel Finish: Factory-applied, gloss-white, baked-acrylic-enamel coating.
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
102800 - 1
H.
Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered).
I.
Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.
J.
Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices:
fabrication.
K.
Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, tamper and theft
resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed.
L.
Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying.
Provide minimum of [six] keys to Owner's representative.
ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install accessories using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit
manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights
indicated.
1.
B.
Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested
according to method in ASTM F 446.
Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function
properly. Replace damaged or defective items. Remove temporary labels and protective
coatings.
END OF SECTION 102800
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
102800 - 2
SECTION 104400 - FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals: Product Data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FIRE-PROTECTION CABINETS
A.
2.2
Fire-Protection Cabinets: Semirecessed cabinets for fire extinguisher.
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product of one
of the following:
a.
J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group.
b.
Kidde Residential and Commercial Division, Subsidiary of Kidde plc.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND BRACKETS
A.
Portable Fire Extinguishers: NFPA 10, listed and labeled for the type, rating, and classification
of extinguisher.
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product of one
of the following:
a.
J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group.
b.
Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc.
B.
Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall
or structure, of sizes required for fire extinguishers indicated, with baked-enamel finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install cabinets at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Install mounting brackets in locations indicated at heights acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
C.
Install fire extinguishers in mounting brackets and cabinets where indicated.
END OF SECTION 104400
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
104400 - 1
SECTION 107113.23 - OVERHEAD COILING EXTERIOR SHUTTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
1. Section includes exterior overhead Roll-Up hurricane shutters.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for all specified components, including
specifications, finish information and installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit scaled shop drawings showing layout, sizes and types, product materials,
components and accessories, fabrication data, wiring diagrams for motor driven operators,
finishes, rough-in dimensions, anchorage with installation requirements and location details,
access point requirements (size and location).
C. Samples: Manufacturer's standard array of colors for selection by Architect.
D. Quality Assurance Submittals:
1. Product Control Approval: Miami Dade County or State of Florida Product Control
Approval for impact protection of exterior openings meeting the structural requirements
of this project. Active at time of installation.
2. Test Reports: Engineer raised seal test reports showing compliance with specified
requirements.
3. Certificates: Engineering certification that design criteria meets specified requirements.
4. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Submit detailed maintenance requirements and
operating instructions.
5. Warranty: Submit specified warranty documents.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain rolling shutters through one source from a single
manufacturer with a minimum of 20 years experience in manufacturing products comparable to
those specified in this section.
B. Installer Qualifications:
a. Use only manufacturer's factory trained installers or qualified installers approved by
shutter manufacturer.
C. Regulatory Requirements:
a. Comply with all local and governing code requirements.
b. Unless required otherwise, fabricate to withstand wind loads that carry same rating as
component and cladding.
D. Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct a pre-installation meeting to verify project installation and
coordination requirements, and field conditions.
E. Electrical Certification:
ANSI approved and labeled UL325 as a complete shutter system.
Individual testing of components will not be acceptable in lieu of system testing.
EXTERIOR SHUTTERS
107113 - 1
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver components in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with
identification labels intact. Store components protected from harmful weather conditions and
damage from other construction activity.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Record actual measurements of openings before fabrication. Show recorded
measurements on As-Built drawings.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty
document executed by an authorized company official.
1. Warranty period: one year parts and labor, not including scaffolding, lifts, or other means
to reach the inaccessible areas. Scaffolding, lifts, or other means to reach inaccessible
areas to be provided by General Contractor during this warrantee period.
2. Motors and motor control systems: Manufacturer’s standard non-depreciating five-year
warranty.
3. Parts only: Pro-rated twenty-year warranty
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. Basis of Design: Roll-a-way by QMI AL7-E, Single Wall Extruded Aluminum Roll Wind
Abatement System, NOA 09-0604.14.
1. 10601 Oak Street NE
Saint Petersburg, FL 33716
(800)446-2500
B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section
01600.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Shutter Components:
1. Slat Types:
a. Aluminum Single Wall Slats: Aluminum, 6063-T5 alloy.
2. Bottom Slat: Extruded aluminum, 6063-T6 alloy, 0.050 inch wall thickness.
3. Operation: Motor operated.
a. Electric Motor operator type: Single phase 110V-60Hz, UL recognized. Motor
sized by manufacturer to handle full shutter load, daily use for minimum 5 year
period.
1. Provide back-up battery power pack.
2. Provide manual override capability allowing manual operation in case of
power outage.
4. End Caps: Die-cast Aluminum. Color selected by Architect.
EXTERIOR SHUTTERS
107113 - 2
5. Box Cover (hood): Roll formed aluminum; .036 inch thickness, 3105-H14 alloy. 4 sided
design. Color selected by Architect.
6. Track Guides: AL7, aluminum extrusion, 6063-T5, lined with insulation woven
polypropylene runners. Color to match)Aluminum extrusions; 6063-T6. Provide
manufacturer's standard (End retention System),
7. Mounting: As shown on the drawings.
. No shutter or supporting component (buildout) shall be mounted to window frames.
a. Build-out required at openings where structural vertical mullions are required
b. Build-out required and mounted to building structure.
8. Slat Hangers: Stainless steel spring design (Powder Coated).
9. Reels: Aluminum, 6063-T6 alloy, round or octagonal.
10. Slat Reinforcement Rebar: Extruded aluminum, 6005-T5 alloy.
2.04 SHOP FINISH
A. Side Frames and Track: Electrostatically applied - ESP - paint finish AMAA 2603.
B. Color: As selected by Architect.
2.05 APPLICATION & DESIGN
A. Box Housing
1. Shape: shall be square.
2. Size: all shutters for project shall be contained in an 8” sized box housing. Sizes larger
than 8” shall not be accepted.
B. CODES: Installed shutters shall meet the required building and/or TDI insurance compliant and
documented per section 1.02 SUBMITTALS.
1. Florida Building Code (FBC) compliant
2. Miami-Dade (High Velocity Hurricane Zone-HVHZ) compliant
3. International Building Code (IBC) compliant
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify conditions of substrates to determine if acceptable for shutter installation in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions. Correct all unsatisfactory conditions prior to commencing
shutter installations.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install track and all shutter components to comply with project shop drawings and manufacturer's
installation product approvals.
1. Where metal surfaces are in contact with masonry, concrete or dissimilar metals, protect
with manufacturer's recommended isolation coatings or tape.
B. After installation, lubricate, test and adjust shutters to operate properly and free from distortion.
EXTERIOR SHUTTERS
107113 - 3
3.03 CLEANING
A. Clean installed components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to Owner's
acceptance. Properly remove from the site all debris remaining from this installation.
B. Inadequate surface cleaning will result in corrosion formation & potential structural damage.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer recommendations and protect completed shutter installations from
damage during remaining construction so as not to void warranty.
END OF SECTION
EXTERIOR SHUTTERS
107113 - 4
SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
Site clearing shall consist of the complete removal and disposal of all trees, brush, stumps, roots,
grass, weeds, rubbish, pavements, utilities and all other obstructions resting on or protruding
through the surface of the existing ground and the surface of the excavated areas.
B.
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, site clearing shall be accomplished within all areas of the
project, except where otherwise designated on the plans, or directed by the Architect/ Engineer.
Areas designated for site grading shall also be cleared and grubbed; however, trees selected by the
Owner for saving shall be protected from construction equipment by the Contractor in a manner
approved by the Architect/Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXISTING FACILITIES TO BE REMOVED
A.
Clearing shall include the removal of all concrete, asphaltic concrete pavement, existing structures
including foundations and concrete piles, drainage structures, fences and appurtenances as
indicated on the Drawings or as required.
B.
Clearing shall further include the disconnection and removal of existing utility lines as indicated on
the drawings. No utility lines other than those shown on the Drawings shall be removed without
the authorization of the Architect/Engineer.
C.
Where excavation is done within the project, all stumps, roots, etc., protruding through or
appearing on the surface of the completed excavation shall be removed to a depth of not less than
2-feet below the excavated surface. All stumps within building site areas shall be grubbed to a
depth of 2-feet below existing grade and replaced with compacted backfill before the areas is filled.
D.
Within all other areas where clearing and grubbing is to be done, all stumps, roots, and other debris
projecting through or appearing on the surface of the ground shall be removed to a depth of 1-foot
below the completed surface.
E.
As an exception to the above provisions, where so directed by the Owner, desirable trees shall be
trimmed, protected and left standing.
F.
Areas to be excavated or filled upon shall be stripped of grass and roots to a depth of 4-inches.
SITE CLEARING
311000 - 1
Stripped materials suitable for topsoil shall be stockpiled for later use and all other material shall be
disposed of as directed by the Architect/Engineer.
G.
All clearing and grubbing debris shall be removed from the project and disposed of by the
Contractor.
END OF SECTION
SITE CLEARING
311000 -2
SECTION 312010 - EARTHWORK FOR BUILDINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B.
Subsurface Exploration Report prepared by Ardaman & Associates, Inc., dated, October 11,
2012.
1.02
A.
SUMMARY
This section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.03
A.
Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-ground.
Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.
Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches within buildings.
DEFINITIONS
Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.
1.
2.
Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to
support sides of pipe.
Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
B.
Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.
D.
Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
E.
Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and
dimensions indicated.
F.
Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
G.
Structures: Buildings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, curbs, pads for mechanical and
electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the
ground surface.
H.
Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or
backfill.
I.
Utilities: Underground services within buildings.
EARTHWORK FOR BUILDINGS
312010-1
1.04
A.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For the following:
1.
B.
Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results
for compliance of the following with requirements indicated:
1.
2.
1.05
A.
Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site and borrow soil material
proposed for fill and backfill.
Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557 for each on-site and borrow
soil material proposed for fill and backfill.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary
utility services according to requirements indicated.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Controlled low-strength material, including design mixture.
Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating.
Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be
removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
SOIL MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not
available from excavations.
B.
Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM,
or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches (75 mm) in any
dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.
C.
Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT
according to ASTM D 2487 or a combination of these groups.
1.
D.
Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of
optimum moisture content at time of compaction.
Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch
(37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
EARTHWORK FOR BUILDINGS
312010-2
E.
2.02
A.
Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch
(25-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
CONTROLLED LOW-STRENGTH MATERIAL
Controlled Low-Strength Material:
material as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Low-density, self-compacting, flowable concrete
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II.
Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F.
Normal-Weight Aggregate:
ASTM C 33, 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal maximum
aggregate size.
Foaming Agent: ASTM C 869.
Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
Produce conventional-weight, controlled low-strength material with 140-psi (965-kPa)
compressive strength when tested according to ASTM C 495.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A.
Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork
operations.
B.
Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil,
debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Section
311000 Site Clearing and in the Subsurface Exploration Report prepared by Ardaman &
Associates, dated October 11, 2012.
C.
Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earthwork operations.
3.02
DEWATERING
A.
Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on
prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.
B.
Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water
accumulation.
1.
Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to
accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.
EARTHWORK FOR BUILDINGS
312010-3
C.
3.03
A.
Pump out any standing water in footing excavations prior to casting footings.
pumping until foundation is fully cast.
EXCAVATION, GENERAL
Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and
subsurface conditions encountered. Excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and
obstructions.
1.
3.04
A.
If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials
and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.
EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25
mm). If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and
removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.
1.
2.
3.05
Maintain
Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation.
Excavate by hand tools to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim
bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility
Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or
minus 1 inch (25 mm). Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing
surfaces.
EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES WITHIN BUILDINGS
A.
Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.
B.
Provide all appropriate excavation stabilization and bracing.
C.
Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or
conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher
than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
D.
Clearance: 12 inches (300 mm) each side of pipe or conduit or as otherwise indicated.
Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of
pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels
of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp
objects along trench subgrade.
1.
For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter and flatbottomed, multiple-duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support pipe
and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade.
EARTHWORK FOR BUILDINGS
312010-4
2.
E.
3.06
For pipes and conduit 6 inches (150 mm) or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of
trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped
sand backfill.
Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches (100 mm) deeper than bottom of pipe elevation to
allow for bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe.
SUBGRADE INSPECTION
A.
Notify Architect and Geotechnical Engineer when excavations have reached required subgrade.
B.
If Geotechnical Engineer determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and
replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.
C.
Proof-roll subgrade below slabs with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets
and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.
1.
2.
D.
3.07
A.
Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or
construction activities, as directed by Geotechnical Engineer, without additional compensation.
STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing.
Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to
prevent
windblown
dust.
1.
3.08
A.
Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
BACKFILL
Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Completely proof-roll subgrade. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h).
Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as
determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.
Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing
and waterproofing.
Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents.
Testing and inspecting underground utilities.
Removing concrete formwork.
Removing trash and debris.
Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.
Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.
Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
EARTHWORK FOR BUILDINGS
312010-5
3.9
UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A.
Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B.
Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding
course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints,
fittings, and bodies of conduits.
C.
Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches (450 mm) of bottom of
footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is
specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete.”
D.
Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil, free of particles larger than 1 inch (25
mm) in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the utility pipe or conduit.
1.
Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both
sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or
displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.
E.
Controlled Low-Strength Material: Place initial backfill of controlled low-strength material to a
height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the utility pipe or conduit.
F.
Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while installing and removing shoring and bracing.
G.
Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.
H.
Controlled Low-Strength Material: Place final backfill of controlled low-strength material to
final subgrade elevation.
3.10
SOIL FILL
A.
Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so
material will bond with existing material.
B.
Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
3.11
A.
fill
SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL
Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before
compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
1.
2.
Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain
frost or ice.
Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that
exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified
dry unit weight.
EARTHWORK FOR BUILDINGS
312010-6
3.12
COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS
A.
Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 12 inches (300 mm) in loose depth
for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 6 inches (150 mm)
in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
B.
Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and
uniformly along the full length of each structure.
C.
Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight
according to ASTM D 1557:
1.
3.13
A.
GRADING
General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply
with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations
indicated.
1.
2.
B.
3.14
95 percent.
Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.
Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface
tolerances.
Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch (13 mm) when tested
with a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing
agency to perform field quality-control testing.
B.
Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with
subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with
requirements.
C.
Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed
to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing
subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when
approved by Architect.
D.
Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556,
ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at
the following locations and frequencies:
1.
2.
Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least 1
test for every 2000 sq. ft. (186 sq. m) or less of building slab, but in no case fewer than 3
tests.
Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and subsequent backfill layer, at least 1 test
for each 150 feet (46 m) or less of trench length, but no fewer than 2 tests.
EARTHWORK FOR BUILDINGS
312010-7
E.
3.15
When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of
compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth
required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
PROTECTION
A.
Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and
Keep free of trash and debris.
B.
Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed
surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent
construction operations or weather conditions.
1.
C.
Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and
recompact.
Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,
backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1.
3.16
erosion.
Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,
and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A.
Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory
soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.
B.
Disposal: Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property.
Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Architect.
1.
Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally
dispose of it off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 312000
EARTHWORK FOR BUILDINGS
312010-8
SECTION 313116 - TERMITE CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals: Product Data and product certificates. Include the EPA-Registered Label.
B.
Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where Project
is located, and who employs workers trained and approved by manufacturer to install
manufacturer's products , and who is accredited by manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
TERMITE CONTROL PRODUCTS
A.
Regulatory Requirements: Provide EPA-registered termiticides and termiticide devices
formulated and applied according to the EPA-Registered Label.
B.
Soil Treatment Termiticide: Provide termiticide complying with requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution.
1.
Service Life of Treatment: Soil treatment termiticide that is effective for not less than
five years against infestation of subterranean termites.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and
with manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products.
B.
Soil Treatment Application: Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and
rate for the maximum specified concentration of termiticide to the following so that a
continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and
under building construction:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
At foundations.
Under concrete floor slabs-on-grade.
Under basement floor slabs.
At hollow masonry.
At expansion and control joints and slab penetrations.
At crawlspaces; treat soil under and adjacent to foundations. Treat adjacent areas
including around entrance platform, porches, and equipment bases.
TERMITE CONTROL
313116 - 1
C.
Post warning signs in areas of soil treatment application.
D.
Reapply soil termiticide treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation or other
construction activities following application.
END OF SECTION 313116
TERMITE CONTROL
313116 - 2
SECTION 310500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR EARTHWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
1.2
Work consists of furnishing all labor, materials, services and equipment as shown on the drawings
and/or specified herein.
DRAINAGE
A.
1.3
Both temporary and permanent drainage shall be constructed and maintained during performance of
the Work. Existing drains, culverts and ditches not interfering with new work shall be kept clean
and operating during construction. Unfinished fills shall be bladed at conclusion of each day's work
so as to permit water runoff. Fill saturated with water because of improper drainage shall be
disposed of or reconditioned to conform to these Specifications.
GRADING OPERATIONS
A.
Work Plan: Prior to commencing grading work Contractor shall consider lay of the land to be
graded and that of adjacent lands and shall plan his work to prevent ponding, flooding and erosion
on the site and adjacent property.
B.
Existing Grades: Contractor shall verify all existing grades shown on the drawings before
commencing grading operations; in case of any conflict, Contractor shall notify the
Architect/Engineer, in writing, and any change necessary shall be made according to the General
Conditions.
C.
Finish Grades: Finish grades shall mean required final elevations or prior existing grades, as noted
on the Drawings.
1.4
DISPOSITION OF UTILITIES
A.
1.5
Rules and regulations governing all utilities shall be observed in work under this heading. Active
as well as inactive and abandoned utilities shall be protected from damage and removed or
relocated only as shown on the Drawings and/or specified herein.
DRIVEWAY CONNECTIONS
A.
1.6
Local conditions, codes and practices shall govern all driveway cuts, aprons, and related curbs and
gutters.
LAYOUT OF WORK
A.
All work shall be carefully laid out. No excavation shall be commenced until the layout has been
completed and all dimensions verified.
END OF SECTION
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR EARTHWORK
310500 - 1
SECTION 321216 - ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
1.2
Work under this Section consists of final preparation of stabilized subgrade constructing limerock
base course and asphaltic concrete wearing surface on roads and driveways complete.
REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS
A.
1.3
The Florida Department of Transportation (DOT) Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction, (Latest Edition), is hereby included as a part of these specifications. Certain
requirements of said specifications are necessarily modified to meet the requirements of this project
and in the case of conflict, the provisions of these specifications will govern.
SUBMITTALS
A.
In general, the following data and shop drawings shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for
approval prior to construction.
1.
2.
3.
Limerock Base Sieve Analysis.
Manufacturer’s Certificates for Prime Coat and Tack Coat.
Asphaltic Concrete Job Mix.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
LIMEROCK BASE
A
Limerock Base course material to be Miami Oolite limerock from which all overburden has been
removed and rock is above ground water table. It shall show no tendency to air slake or undergo
chemical change under exposure to weather, nor shall it contain more than 3.0 percent organic
matter at point of delivery on job site. Limerock shall contain by weight, not less than 70.0 percent
of carbonates of calcium and magnesium (Grade No. 2), and not more than 2.0 percent of oxides of
iron and aluminum (Grade No. 2). Any other constituents other than carbonates and oxides shall be
silica.
B.
Gradation: Limerock shall be graded as follows:
Passing 3 - 1/2 inch sieve - not less than 97 percent.
Passing 3/4 inch sieve - not less than 70 percent.
Fine material: All fine material to consist entirely of dust fracture.
ASPHALT PAVING
321216 - 1
Uniformity: The limerock shall be uniform in quality and shall not contain hard or flinty pieces in
sufficient quantity to prevent proper bonding, or to prevent obtaining a smooth surface, free from
pits or pockets.
C.
2.2
Testing Base Course Material: Furnish testing laboratory reports for each 500 cubic yards of
limerock base course material proposed to be used in the work. Tests to be made from samples
taken at the job site by the laboratory. These reports state whether or not the material so treated
conforms to these Specifications.
BITUMINOUS PRIME COAT
A.
2.3
Prime coat material to be in accordance with Section 300 of the FDOT Standard Specification.
ASPHALTIC CONCRETE SURFACE COURSE
A.
Type S-3 asphaltic concrete wearing surface, compacted thickness as shown on the Drawings and
in accordance with Section 331 of the aforesaid FDOT Standard Specification.
B.
Job Mix Formula: The job mix formula shall produce a mixture possessing not less than 1500
pounds stability at 140 degrees F., as determined by the Standard Hubbard-Field Stability Test and
the laboratory compacted mixture shall have a density of not less than 95 nor more than 98 percent
of the calculated theoretical density of a voidless mixture composed of the same materials in like
proportions. Contractor to supply certificate from Asphalt Supplier that mix provided complies
with and meets requirements of aforesaid FDOT Specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE
A.
3.2
The surface of finished subgrade stabilized shall be made to conform to the lines and grades shown
on the Drawings. Maintain the finished subgrade free from ruts and depressions.
LIMEROCK BASE COURSE
A.
3.3
Construct a limerock base course on the prepared subgrade. The compacted thickness to be as
shown on the Drawings.
CONSTRUCTION METHOD
A.
Equipment: All equipment necessary for the proper construction of limerock base course to be on
the construction site, in first class working condition. Rollers to be of the steel-wheel type, 3
wheel, and to weigh not less than 10 tons. Blade graders to weigh not less than 3 tons and have a
wheel base not less than 15 feet and a blade length of not less than 12 feet.
B.
Spreading Limerock: Limerock base course material to be spread uniformly with mechanical
spreaders, shovels, forks, rakes and other equipment common to the trade. The base material to be
placed in a single course.
ASPHALT PAVING
321216 - 2
C.
Compacting and Finishing: After spreading is completed, base material to be rolled with a ten ton
roller hereinabove specified until the entire depth of base material is compacted into a dense
unyielding mass. After rolling, the surface to be thoroughly scarified to a minimum depth of 2
inches and shaped to the design cross section shown on the Drawings. Water shall be applied and
the surface again thoroughly rolled. Continue rolling and watering until the entire depth of base is
bonded and compacted into a dense, unyielding mass, true to design grade and cross section.
Apply water in sufficient quantities to obtain a satisfactory bond. Mixing of base course material
with subgrade will not be acceptable.
D.
Testing Surface: The finished surface of base course to be checked with a 12 foot straightedge and
all irregularities exceeding 1/4 inch shall be corrected by scarifying, removing or adding rock as
may be required after which the entire area shall be recompacted. In testing the surface, the
measure in cuts will not be taken in small holes caused by individual pieces of rock having been
pulled out by the grader.
3.4
COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
3.5
The base course shall be compacted to a minimum of 98 percent of the maximum density of the
material as determined by AASHTO Method T-180. In place density tests shall be performed, one
test per 500 square yards in place.
SURFACE TREATMENT
A.
Remove Loose Material: Prior to placing any bituminous material on the completed base course
the entire surface to be broomed of all dust and other loose material.
B.
Bituminous Prime Coat: Apply a bituminous prime coat on the prepared limerock base course in
accordance with Section 300 of the FDOT Specifications.
C.
Place asphaltic concrete on primed base course in accordance with Section 331 of the FDOT
Specifications. In areas that are inaccessible to mechanical spreaders, hand spreading by skilled
workmen will be permitted.
3.6
A.
3.7
A.
PAVEMENT EDGES
Construct all pavement edges in strict accordance with the design section shown on the Drawings.
PROTECTION PAVEMENT
After the completion of the pavement, no vehicular traffic of any kind will be permitted on the
finished surface until it has set sufficiently as determined by the Architect/Engineer.
END OF SECTION
ASPHALT PAVING
321216 - 3
SECTION 32 13 13 - CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUBMITTALS
In general, the following data and shop drawings shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for
approval prior to construction:
1.
2.
3.
Concrete Design Mix.
Reinforcing Steel Shop Drawings.
Manufacturer’s Literature: Admixtures, Sealants, Joint Materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Forms: Steel, wood or other suitable material of size and strength to resist movement during
concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until removal. Use straight
forms, free of distortion and defects. Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form
radius bends as required.
B.
Release Agent: Coat forms with a nonstanding form release agent that will not discolor or deface
surface of concrete.
C.
Welded Wire Mesh: Welded plain cold-drawn steel wire fabric, ASTM A 185. Furnish in flat
sheets, not rolls, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect/Engineer.
D.
Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60.
E.
Fabricated Bar Mats: Welded or clip-assembled steel bar or rod mats, ASTM A 184. Use ASTM
A 615, Grade 60 steel bars, unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends
square and free of burrs.
G.
Hook Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A bolts, internally and externally threaded. Design hook bolt
joint assembly to hold coupling against pavement form and in position during concreting
operations, and to permit removal without damage to concrete or hook bolt.
H.
Concrete Materials: Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 sections for concrete
materials, admixtures, bonding materials, curing materials, and others as required.
I.
Expansion Joint Materials: Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 sections for
preformed expansion joint fillers and sealers.
CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 1
J.
Anti-Spalling Compound: Combination of boiled linseed oil and mineral spirits, complying with
AASHTO M-233.
K.
Liquid-Membrane Forming and Sealing Curing Compound: Comply with ASTM C 309, Type I,
Class B unless other type acceptable to Engineer. Moisture loss no more than 0.055 gr./sq. cm.
when applied at 200 sq. ft./gal.
1.
L.
Bonding Compound: Acrylic base, non-rewettable type.
1.
M.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. "Masterseal"; Master Builders.
b. "A-H 3 Way Sealer"; Anti-Hydro Waterproofing Co.
c. "Eucodure"; Euclid Chemical Co.
d. "Clear Seal"; A.C. Horn.
e. "Day Chem Cure/Seal"; Dayton Superior.
f. "Sure Cure"; Kaufman Products Inc.
g. "AR-30"; W.R. Meadows.
h. "Sealkure"; Toch Div. - Carboline.
i. "Kure-N-Seal"; Sonneborn-Contech.
j. "Polyclear"; Upco Chemical/USM Corp.
k. "L&M Cure"; L & M Construction Chemicals.
l. "Klearseal"; Setcon Industries.
m. "LR-152"; Protex Industries.
n. "Hardtop"; Gifford-Hill.
o. "Spartan-Cote"; The Burke Co.
p. "Lambco-120"; Lambert Corp.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provided one of the following:
a. "J-40 Bonding Agent"; Dayton Superior Corp.
b. "Weldcrete"; Larsen Products.
c. "Intralok"; W.R. Meadows.
d. "Everbond"; L & M Construction Chemicals.
e. "Flex-Con"; Euclid Chemical Co.
f. "Hornweld"; A.C. Horn.
g. "Sonocrete"; Sonneborn-Contech.
h. "Acrylic Bondcrete"; The Burke Co.
i. "Acrylbond"; Lambert Corp.
Epoxy Adhesive: ASTEM C 881, 2-component material suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces.
Provide material "Type", "Grade", and "Class" to suit project requirements.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. "Epoxtite"; A.C. Horn.
b. "Edoco 2118 Epoxy Adhesive"; Edoco Technical Products.
c. "Sikadur Hi-Mod"; Sika Chemical Corp.
d. "Euco Epoxy 463 or 615"; Euclid Chemical Co.
e. "Patch and Bond Epoxy"; The Burke Co,.
f. "Sure-Poxy"; Kaufman Products Inc.
g. "Epiweld 580 or 560 (Gel)"; Lambert Corp.
CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 2
2.2
CONCRETE MIX, DESIGN, AND TESTING
A.
Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 Sections for concrete mix design, sampling and
testing, and quality control and as herein specified.
B.
Design mix to produce normal-weight concrete consisting of portland cement, aggregate, waterreducing or high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer), air-entraining admixture, and
water to produce the following properties.
1.
2.
3.
Compressive strength: 3,000 psi, minimum at 28 days, unless otherwise indicated.
Slump Limits: 8 inches minimum for concrete containing high-range water-reducing
admixture (superplasticizer); 3 inches for other concretes.
Air Content: 5 to 8 percent.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SURFACE PREPARATION
A.
Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.
B.
Proof-roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and need for additional compaction.
Do not begin paving work until such conditions have been corrected and are ready to receive
paving.
3.2
FORM CONSTRUCTION
A.
Set forms to required grades and lines, braced and secured. Install forms to allow continuous
progress of work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.
B.
Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to following tolerances:
1.
2.
Top of forms not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
Vertical face on longitudinal axis, not more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet.
C.
Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent as required to ensure separation from
concrete without damage.
D.
Slope step treads at 1/4 inch per foot to drain.
3.3
A.
3.4
A.
REINFORCEMENT
Locate, place and support reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Sections, unless otherwise
indicated.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
General: Comply with requirements of Division 3 Sections for mixing and placing concrete, and as
herein specified.
CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 3
B.
Do not place concrete until subbase and forms have been checked for line and grade. Moisten
subbase if required to provide a uniform dampened conditions at time concrete is placed. Do not
place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevations and
alignment.
C.
Place concrete by methods that prevent segregation of mix. Consolidate concrete along face of
forms and adjacent to transverse joints with internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint
assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand-spreading and
consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocation of reinforcing, dowels, and joint
devices.
D.
Use bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially
hardened concrete surfaces.
E.
Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints as far as possible.
If interrupted for more than 1/2 hour, place a construction joint.
F.
When adjacent pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment on concrete
until pavement has attained sufficient strength to carry loads without injury.
G.
Fabricated Bar Mats: Keep mats clean and free from excessive rust, and handle units to keep them
flat and free from distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities or replace units as
required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch overlap to adjacent mats.
1.
2.
3.5
Place concrete in 2 operations; strike off initial pour for entire width of placement and to the
required depth below finish surface. Lay fabricated bar mats immediately in final position.
Place top layer of concrete, strike off, and screed.
Remove and replace portions of bottom layer of concrete that have been placed more than 15
minutes without being covered by top layer or use bonding agent if acceptable to
Architect/Engineer.
JOINTS
A.
General: Construction expansion, weakened-plane (contraction), and construction joints true to
line with face perpendicular to surface of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to the
centerline, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
When joining existing structures, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints,
unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Weakened-Plane (Contraction) Joints: Provide weakened-plane (contraction) joints, sectioning
concrete into areas as shown on drawings. Construct weakened-plane joints for a depth equal to at
least 1/4 concrete thickness, as follows:
1.
Tooled Joints: Form weakened-plane joints in fresh concrete by grooving top portion with a
recommended cutting tool and finishing edges with a jointer.
2.
Sawed Joints: Form weakened-plane joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut joints into hardened concrete as soon as surface
will not be torn, abraded, or otherwise damaged by cutting action.
3.
Inserts: Use embedded strips of metal or sealed wood to form weakened-plane joints. Set
CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 4
strips into plastic concrete and carefully remove strips after concrete has hardened.
D.
Construction Joints: Place construction joints at end of placements and at locations where
placement operations are stopped for more than 1/2 hour, except where such placements terminate
at expansion joints.
1.
2.
E.
Construction joints as shown or, if not shown, use standard metal keyway-section forms.
Where load transfer-slip dowel devices are used, install so that one end of each dowel bar is
free to move.
Expansion Joints: Provide premolded joint filler for expansion joints abutting concrete curbs,
catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walk, and other fixed objects, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Locate expansion joints at 25 feet o.c. for each pavement lane unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below
finished surface where joint sealer is indicated. If no joint sealer, place top of joint filler flush with
finished concrete surface.
G.
Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths for full width being placed wherever possible. Where
more than one length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together.
H.
Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with a metal cap or other temporary
material. Remove protection after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint.
I.
Fillers and Sealants: Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 sections for preparation
of joints, materials, installation, and performance.
3.6
CONCRETE FINISHING
A.
After striking-off and consolidating concrete, smooth surface by screeding and floating. Use hand
methods only where mechanical floating is not possible. Adjust floating to compact surface and
produce uniform texture.
B.
After floating, test surface for trueness with a 10-ft straightedge. Distribute concrete as required to
remove surface irregularities, and refloat repaired areas to provide a continuous smooth finish.
C.
Work edges of slabs, gutters, back top edge of curb, and formed joints with an edging tool, and
round to 1/2-inch radius, unless otherwise indicated. Eliminate tool mark on concrete surface.
D.
After completion of floating and when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared, complete
troweling and finish surface as follows:
1.
Broom finish by drawing a medium broom across concrete surface perpendicular to line of
traffic. Repeat operation if required to provide a fine line texture acceptable to Engineer. On
inclined slab surfaces, provide a course, non-slip finish by scoring surface with a stiffbristled
broom, perpendicular to line of traffic.
2.
Burlap finish by dragging a seamless strip of damp burlap across concrete, perpendicular to
line of traffic. Repeat operation to provide a gritty texture acceptable to Architect/Engineer.
CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 5
E.
3. 7
Do not remove forms for 24 hours after concrete has been placed. After form removal, clean ends
of joints and point-up any minor honeycombed areas. Remove and replace areas or sections with
major defects, as directed by Architect/Engineer.
CURING
A.
Protect and cure finished concrete paving in compliance with applicable requirements of Division 3
sections. Use membrane-forming curing and sealing compound or approved moist-curing methods.
B.
Anti-spalling Treatment: Apply treatment to concrete surfaces no sooner than 28 days after
placement, to clean, dry concrete, free of oil, dirt and other foreign material. Apply curing and
sealing compound at a maximum coverage rate of 300 s.f. per gallon. Apply antispalling
compound in 2 sprayed applications. First application at rate of 40 sq. yds. per gal.; second
application at 60 sq. yds. per gallon. Allow complete drying between applications.
3.8
REPAIRS AND PROTECTIONS
A.
Repair or replace broken or defective concrete, as directed by Architect/Engineer.
B.
Drill test cores where directed by Architect/Engineer when necessary to determine magnitude of
cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland
cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive.
C.
Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least
14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as
possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.
D.
Sweep concrete pavement and wash free of stains, discolorations, dirt, and other foreign material
just before Final Inspection.
END OF SECTION
CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 6
SECTION 321613 - CONCRETE SIDEWALK, CURB AND CURB & GUTTER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
SUBMITTALS
In general, the following data and shop drawings shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for
approval prior to construction:
1.
2.
3.
Concrete Design Mix.
Reinforcing Steel Shop Drawings.
Manufacturer’s Literature: Admixtures, Sealants, Joint Materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Concrete for work under this Section shall be 3,000 psi Class I.
B.
Forms: Steel, wood or other suitable material of size and strength to resist movement during
concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until removal. Use straight
forms, free of distortion and defects. Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form
radius bends as required.
C.
Release Agent: Coat forms with a nonstanding form release agent that will not discolor or deface
surface of concrete.
D.
Welded Wire Mesh: Welded plain cold-drawn steel wire fabric, ASTM A 185. Furnish in flat
sheets, not rolls, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect/Engineer.
E.
Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60.
F.
Fabricated Bar Mats: Welded or clip-assembled steel bar or rod mats, ASTM A 184. Use ASTM
A 615, Grade 60 steel bars, unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends
square and free of burrs.
H.
Hook Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A bolts, internally and externally threaded. Design hook bolt
joint assembly to hold coupling against pavement form and in position during concreting
operations, and to permit removal without damage to concrete or hook bolt.
I.
Concrete Materials: Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 sections for concrete
materials, admixtures, bonding materials, curing materials, and others as required.
J.
Expansion Joint Materials: Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 sections for
preformed expansion joint fillers and sealers.
CONCRETE SIDEWALK, CURB AND CURB & GUTTER
321613 - 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
Subgrade shall be firmly packed base placed on undisturbed earth, finished to smooth surface for
concrete placement.
B.
Forms shall be of metal or wood, straight, free from warp, of sufficient strength to resist springing
during concreting operations and kept in place minimum of 12 hours.
C.
Finishing: Float concrete until 1/4" cement gel is brought to surface; steel trowel until dense
surface is obtained. Finish with fine line texture at right angles to alignment of walk, then round all
edges with 1/4" radius after brooming.
D.
Curing: Cover concrete walks with sand, sawdust or shavings and keep wet for three (3) days;
cover walks until final clean-up to prevent damage. Other methods of curing may be used subject
to approval of the Architect/Engineer prior to implementation.
3.2
CONCRETE SIDEWALK
A.
Concrete walks shall be constructed to lines, widths, grades and thickness as shown on the
drawings, but sloped not less than 1/4" per foot in direction of water flow. Concrete shall be placed
on thoroughly compacted subgrade, having smooth surface and kept moist till the time concrete is
placed.
B.
Expansion joints shall be installed at all intersections with other walks, at head and bottom of steps,
curbs and other structures and a maximum 50' o.c. in runs. Expansion materials shall be 1/2" thick
by depth of concrete. Expansion material shall extend from bottom of walk slab to within 1/2" of
top. The top 1/2" shall be filled with poured joint filler.
C.
Contraction joints shall be 1/4" wide and shall be the depth of the slab, and shall be spaced at a
maximum 20' o.c. Use 1/4" jointer, cutting blade not over 1/4" thick; use immediately following
brooming of surface. Dummy grooves shall be 1/8" x 1-1/2", having 1/4" radius, unless noted
otherwise on the drawings, and installed the same as contraction joints, immediately following
brooming.
3.3
CONCRETE CURB/CURB & GUTTER
A.
Form curb to profiles indicated.
B.
Form in lengths not to exceed 25'-0", with expansion joints at 50'-0" intervals.
C.
Curb may be placed using automatic curb machine, where applicable.
D.
Form curb to straight lines and true arises. Formwork shall hold weight of wet concrete without
deflection. Lay out radii with curved formwork. Clean formwork prior to re-use.
E.
Curb shall receive a smooth formed finish in accord with ACI-301-72.
END OF SECTION
CONCRETE SIDEWALK, CURB AND CURB & GUTTER
321613 - 2
SECTION 321723 - PAVEMENT MARKINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
SCOPE OF WORK
Intent: Traffic striping of asphaltic concrete paving.
REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS
The Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT) Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction, (Latest Edition) is hereby included as part of these Specifications.
SUBMITTALS
Submit paint tests to show compliance with requirements of Section 971-12 of the FDOT
Specifications and as applicable to the hereinafter specified material.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Work shall be performed in accordance with the contract documents in a neat and accurate manner.
All equipment shall be of a type and design which will readily obtain the required uniformity of
application of the pavement markings both as to thickness of coating and as to alignment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Traffic Paint and Thermoplastic Stripes: In accordance with requirements as specified in Section
971-12 and Section 711 of the FDOT Specifications. Paint to be compatible with receiving
surfaces.
B.
Paint Color: White and yellow as indicated on the Drawings. All stripes and markings for
handicapped spaces shall be blue, per Code. All stripes and marking for carriage spaces shall be
green per Code.
C.
Glass Spheres: Apply to thermoplastic, where noted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION
A.
Time of Application: Painting shall be done only during daylight hours and, as far as practical,
shall be terminated in time to permit sufficient drying by sunset.
B.
Weather Limitations: No paint shall be applied when any moisture is present on the surface to be
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
321723 - 1
painted or when the air temperature is below 40 degrees F. Painting shall not be done when winds
are sufficient to cause spray.
C.
Preparation of Surface to be Painted: The surface which is to be painted shall be cleaned by
compressed air or other effective means, immediately before the start of painting and shall be clean
and dry when the paint is applied. Any vegetation and loose soil shall be removed from the
pavement before striping is begun.
D.
Mixing Paint: The paint shall be thoroughly mixed per manufacturers directions before it is poured
into the painting machine and no thinning of the paint in the machine will be allowed at any time.
Before the start of each day's work, the paint container, the connections, and the spray nozzles on
the machine shall be thoroughly cleaned with paint thinner or other suitable cleaner. Thermoplastic
equipment shall provide continuous mixing.
E.
Paint Application: The traffic markings shall be of the specified dimensions with clean, true edges
and without sharp breaks in the alignment. A uniform coating of paint shall be obtained and the
finished markings shall contain no light spots or paint skips. All stripes which do not have a
uniform, satisfactory appearance, both day and night, shall be corrected.
F.
Rate of Paint Application: The minimum rate of application for paint shall be as follows:
Four-inch solid parking stall strips: 300 linear feet per gallon.
Any other width stripe or markings: A direct proportion of the above.
G.
Required Film Thickness: The minimum wet film thickness for all painted areas shall be 15 mils.
Thermoplastic thickness shall comply with Section 711-4.4 of the FDOT Specifications.
H.
Alignment of Stripes: Where a stripe deviates from the correct alignment, as indicated by a
stringline, by more than one inch in any 20 foot length, it shall be obliterated and the stripe
corrected as specified in the paragraph "corrective measures".
3.2
PROTECTION OF PAINTED MARKINGS
A.
Protection of Stripes: All newly painted stripes, or other markings, shall be protected until the
paint is sufficiently dry to permit vehicles to cross the marking without damage from the tires.
While the stripes are being painted, all traffic shall be routed to the opposite side of the painting
operations.
B.
Protection of Traffic: Warning signs and barricades shall be set up before the beginning of each
operation and extra signs shall be kept well ahead of the painting equipment. The painting
equipment shall be so operated that traffic may pass safely. Warning signs are to be placed only
where operations are in progress and are to be relocated as often as is necessary.
C.
Protective Devices: The Contractor shall erect adequate warnings signs, and take all necessary
precautions for the protection of the wet paint and the safety of the public. Cones, barricades, or
similar protective devices, shall be placed along the newly painted stripe to prevent traffic from
crossing the wet paint. All protective devices shall be removed not later than sunset to allow free
movement of traffic at night.
D.
Repair of Damaged Areas: All portions of the stripes damaged by passing traffic or from any other
cause shall be repainted at the Contractor's expense.
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
321723 - 2
3.3
CORRECTIVE MEASURES
A.
All painted markings which fail to meet the specifications including the permissible tolerances and
the appearance requirements, or are marred or damaged by traffic or from other causes, shall be
corrected at the Contractor's expenses. All drip and spattered paint shall be removed. Whenever it
is necessary to remove paint it shall be done by means which will not damage the underlying
surface of the pavement. When necessary to correct a deviation which exceeds the permissible
tolerance in alignment, that portion of the stripe shall be removed and repainted in accordance with
these specifications.
B.
Corrective Devices: Misalignment, defective surfaces, etc., shall be corrected by sandblasting or
by any other type of mechanical device which will effectively remove the paint without damage to
the pavement surface.
3.4
DIMENSIONS AND ALIGNMENT TOLERANCES:
A.
Dimensions: No markings shall be less than the specified width. No markings shall exceed the
specified width by more than 1/2 inch.
B.
Correction Rates: Any corrections of variances in the width or in the alignment of stripes shall not
be made abruptly but the stripes shall be returned to the design width at the rate of at least 1/2 inch
per foot of correction.
END OF SECTION
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
321723 - 3
SECTION 32 84 00 - IRRIGATION
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Provide all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to perform the irrigation
work, complete, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified.
B.
The completed and proper construction of the landscape irrigation system
including, but not limited to:
1.
All at grade piping, including: mains, laterals, fittings, connections, tees,
risers, clamps, and swing joints.
2.
All control, gate, globe, pressure reducing, quick coupling and other valves
including: valve boxes, markers, connections, operators and other
accessories.
3.
Complete automatic control system as shown on plans: including controllers,
control wiring connections and electrical supply.
4.
All rotating and stationary sprinkler heads including: proper nozzles as called
for herein and shown on the plans and all other appurtenances and
accessories for proper operations.
5. All drip irrigation including supply lines, appurtenances and accessories for
proper operation.
6. Connections of piping to supply sources as shown on the plans.
IRRIGATION
7.
All excavation, site-work, relocation or replacement of utilities, backfill and
restoration of all disturbed areas.
8.
Provide complete and operable system for the irrigation of all areas to be
landscaped on the project site. The plans and these specifications are
intended to include all items obviously necessary and requisite for the proper
irrigation of the project. This in no way relives the Contractor of his
responsibility to furnish any additional labor, materials and equipment
required for a proper system.
9.
Adjust head location, type and size, and any other system components to
comply with the requirements of landscaping as actually installed.
32 84 00 - 1
1.02
1.03
9.
Supply, deliver, store, and protect all equipment and materials including pipe
and fittings, sprinkler heads, valves, controllers, wire, and all other
component parts necessary for the installation of a fully automatic irrigation
system as indicated in the plans and specifications.
10.
Provide adequate security of materials on site.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All applicable ANSI, AWWA, and ASTM Standards and Specifications, and all
applicable building codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the
work.
B.
The Contractor shall be responsible for constructing the system in complete
accordance with all local codes, ordinances and laws. Any modification made to
conform with said codes, laws, and ordinances shall be completed at the Contractor's
expenses with no additional compensation allowed.
C.
The Contractor shall provide full coverage in all irrigated areas and shall be
responsible for additional heads and components as required, installed at his own
cost.
D.
Work shall be guaranteed for one year from date of acceptance against all defects in
material, equipment and workmanship. Repairs if required shall be done promptly.
SUBMITTALS
A.
After completion of installation, furnish complete as-built reproducibles showing
locations of all sprinkler heads, valves, drains, and piping to scale, with dimensions
where required or necessary, to show vertical and horizontal deviations from the bid
documents made during construction affecting but not limited to the mainline pipe,
controller locations, remote control valves, quick-coupling valves and all sprinkler
heads. The Drawings shall also indicate and show approved substitutions of size,
material and manufacturer's name and catalog number. All piping shall be
dimensioned and drawn to scale. Remote control valves and isolation valves shall
have two (2) measurements from fixed objects. Provide two copies of the drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
PVC PIPING
A.
IRRIGATION
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) plastic pipe shall be virgin, high impact. Pipe shall
conform to U.S. Department of Commerce Commercial Standard CS 207-60 or latest
revision.
32 84 00 - 2
B.
2.02
GALVANIZED PIPE
A.
2.03
2.04
2.05
Main lines, sleeves, laterals, and risers shall be SCH 40 PVC conforming to ASTM
D, 1785.
Pipe installed above grade shall be galvanized painted steel conforming to ASTM
A.120 Schedule 40.
FITTINGS
A.
PVC fittings shall be SCH 40, Type 1, and must be of domestic manufacture. Fittings
shall be identified according to pressure rating or schedule.
B.
Galvanized fittings shall be malleable iron screwed fittings conforming to ANSI B.
16.3.
SWING JOINTS AND RISERS
A.
Shrub heads shall be installed on 1/2" SCH 40 PVC Risers which shall be painted
black.
B.
Pop-up spray heads shall be installed on flexible swing joints consisting of Toro
thick-walled poly pipe and appropriate insert elbows.
SPRINKLER HEADS
A.
All sprinkler heads shall be as manufactured by Rainbird, Inc. or approved equal.
The manufacturer shall guarantee all sprinklers and components for not less than
one (1) year from installation, warranted against all defects in normal material and
workmanship.
B.
Shrub Spray Heads shall be of the fixed spray type designed for in ground
installation. The sprinkler shall be capable of covering up to a fifteen-foot radius at
25 P.S.I.
C.
Pop-Up Rotary Heads:
1.
IRRIGATION
The sprinkler shall be of the gear driven rotary type, capable of covering a 35 foot
radius at 40 PSI with a discharge rate of 1.8 to 4.9 GPM. Each sprinkler shall
include a set of twelve standard interchangeable nozzles or seven low-angle
nozzles. The sprinkler shall have a radius adjustment capabilities by means of a
stainless steel nozzle retainer/ radius adjustment screw.
32 84 00 - 3
2.07
PLASTIC ELECTRIC VALVES
A.
Series and manufacturer
1.
2.
2.08
VALVE BOXES
A.
2.09
Valve boxes for electric and manual valves shall be Ametek plastic boxes or
approved equal with green covers and designed for installation with irrigation
systems.
ELECTRICAL CONTROLLERS
A.
Series and manufacturers
1.
2.10
The sprinkler controllers shall provide for a complete automatic operation of the sprinkler
system.
C.
Controllers shall be housed in a wall mountable, weather resistant, plastic cabinet suitable
for either indoor or outdoor installation
IRRIGATION CONTROL WIRE
All electrical control and ground wire shall be irrigation control cable.
GATE VALVES
A.
2.12
Controllers shall be as manufactured by Rainbird or approved equal.
B.
A.
2.11
Rainbird manufacturer or approved equal
Plastic Diaphragm Valves
Gate valves shall be 150 Lb. Brass with non-rising stem, and shall be manufactured
by Crane or approved equal.
WATER CONSERVATION EQUIPMENT
A. Rain sensors. Rain sensors shall be UL listed, 125 VAC, 4AMP rated, which interrupts
the common wire to the controller by sensing a preset amount of rainfall. Rain switch
shall be as manufactured by Hilton or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
IRRIGATION
32 84 00 - 4
3.02
A.
Layout of Mains and Laterals: Layout sprinkler main lines and perform line
adjustments and site modification to lateral prior to excavation.
B.
Layout of Sprinkler Heads: Stake sprinkler head locations and check for uniformity
of coverage and correctness of pattern.
C.
Valve Location: Locate valves to assure ease of access for maintenance and that no
physical interference with other elements of the project exists. Align valves parallel
to each other in manifold systems.
PIPE INSTALLATION
A.
The Contractor shall stake out the location of each run of pipe, sprinkler heads, and
valves prior to trenching. Contractor shall refer and comply to the Trench Safety Act
in General Conditions, prior to any excavation.
B.
Parallel lines shall not be installed directly over one another. No lateral line shall be
installed directly over another. No lateral line shall be installed in the main line
trench. Trenches for pipe lines shall be made of sufficient depths to provide the
minimum cover from finish grade as follows:
C.
3.03
1.
24 in. minimum cover over main lines and laterals routed under pavement.
2.
18 in. Minimum cover over main lines and 12" minimum cover over laterals.
3.
15 in. minimum cover over control wires from controllers to valves.
4.
24 in. minimum cover for pipe under vehicular use areas or roads.
Place pipe to be installed under roadways, sidewalks, walls, stairs or other hardscape
areas, in SCH 40 PVC sleeve which had an inside diameter of not less than one inch
larger than the outside of the pipe or the combined outside diameter of pipes
installed. All sleeves shall be buried a minimum of 24" beneath all hard surfaces and
extend a minimum of 24" beyond hard surface areas. Run irrigation piping and
electrical conduit sleeves in same trench with a minimum of 6" separation. Irrigation
Contractor shall coordinate with General Contractor so that installation of sleeves
precedes hard surface installation.
SPRINKLER HEAD INSTALLATION
A.
Contractor shall be responsible for the exact location of all sprinkler heads,
acknowledging that the plans are schematic in nature. The Contractor shall
accordingly place all sprinkler heads, adjust all nozzles, spray patterns, and make
whatever other adjustments that may be required to give the landscaped areas full,
IRRIGATION
32 84 00 - 5
complete, and proper coverage and distributions, and to meet all manufacturer's
requirements.
B.
Shrub spray sprinklers shall be installed on SCH 40 PVC risers as shown in the
detailed drawings. Each sprinkler shall be installed within plant masses to be
concealed from view. Shrub sprinklers shall be installed 12" away from adjacent
curbs, sidewalks, fences, buildings, or edge of paving for protection.
C.
Pop-up sprinklers shall be installed on swing joints as shown in detailed drawings.
Each sprinkler head shall be installed so that the top is slightly above the finish grade
level.
3.04
CONTROLLERS
A.
Each controller shall be installed following the recommendations of the manufacturer.
The location of all controllers shall be approved by the Landscape Architect before the
actual installation of the controllers.
3.05
CONTROL WIRE INSTALLATION
3.06
A.
Install control wires at least 15 in. below finish grade and lay to the side of the main
line. Provide a minimum of 24 in. of looped wire slack at valves and snake wires in
trench to allow for contraction of wires
B.
All underground splices shall be made at electric valves in valve boxes.
C.
All wire passing under existing or future paving or construction shall be encased in
SCH 40 PVC conduit extending at least 24 in. beyond the edges of paving and
stabilized for construction. Any wire in plant beds shall be installed in 3/4" Class
160 PVC. 18" min. burial. Installation procedures must conform to local codes.
D.
Wire shall be color coded to facilitate troubleshooting.
AUTOMATIC VALVES
A.
3.07
GATE VALVES
A.
3.08
All automatic valves shall be installed in a valve box and shall be arranged for easy
adjustment and removal.
Gate valves shall be installed in accordance with local codes and arranged in valve
box for easy adjustment and removal.
VALVE BOXES
IRRIGATION
32 84 00 - 6
A.
3.09
Valve boxes shall be installed so the top of the box is at finished grade and parallel to
adjacent boxes, curbs and walks.
TESTING AND INSPECTION
A.
Cleaning and pressure testing: Flush irrigation system with water to clear lines of
foreign materials after system assembly is complete and prior to installation of
sprinkler heads. Cap and plug outlets and fill lines with water. Pressurize assembly to
100 P.S.I. and shut off pump. System shall hold at 100 P.S.I. for one hour at no loss
of pressure
B.
Final inspection shall be made when the complete system is in place, operable, and all
repairs, additions, adjustments, and other work is complete. At such time, the
Contractor shall adequately demonstrate the proper operation of the system, shall
show the system's complete conformance with the plans and specifications, and
demonstrate that the irrigation system gives proper and adequate coverage of all
landscaped areas.
END OF SECTION 32 84 00
IRRIGATION
32 84 00 - 7
SECTION 32 90 00 - TREES, PALMS SHRUBS AND GROUNDCOVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A.
1.02
Provide all labor, materials, necessary equipment, services and included but not limited to
all related work to complete the trees, palms, shrubs and groundcovers work, as indicated
on the Drawings, as specified herein or both, except for items specifically indicated as
"NIC ITEMS".
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
B.
Selection of plant materials
1.
1.03
UNAVAILABILITY OF PLANT MATERIAL
A.
1.04
Submit to the Architect the names and locations of nurseries proposed as sources
of acceptable plant material. Inspect all nursery materials to determine that the
materials meet the requirements of this Section. Proposed materials shall be
flagged at the nurseries by the Contractor prior to viewing by the Architect.
Before changes or substitutions can be made due to unavailability of plant material,
submit satisfactory evidence that he has advertised for one month in a trade journal such
as the "Landscape Information Services", with no response, or has undertaken other
methods of locating plant material satisfactory to the Architect.
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A.
The Landscape Architect will inspect all work for Substantial Completion upon written
notice of completion. The request shall be received at least ten calendar days before the
anticipated date of inspection.
B.
Acceptance of plant material by the Landscape Architect will be for general conformance
to specified size, character, and quality, and shall not diminish responsibility for full
conformance with the Contract Documents.
C.
Upon completion and re-inspection of all repairs or renewals necessary in the judgement
of the Landscape Architect, the Landscape Architect will recommend to the Owner that
the work of this Section be accepted as Substantially Complete.
D.
Acceptance in Part
1.
The work may be accepted in parts when it is deemed to be in the Owner’s best
interest to do so, and when permission is given to the Contractor in writing to
complete the work in parts.
TREES, PALMS, SHRUBS AND GROUNDCOVERS
32 90 00 - 1
2. Acceptance and use of such areas by the Owner shall not waive any other provisions
of this Contract.
1.05
MAINTENANCE
A.
1.06
Maintain plant material as described in PART 3 of this Section.
GUARANTEE
A.
Plants shall be guaranteed for a period of one year after the date of Final Acceptance.
1.
When the work is accepted in parts, the guarantee periods shall extend from each
of the partial acceptances to the terminal date of the last guarantee period. Thus
all guarantee period terminate at one time.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
PLANTS
A.
Except as other wise specified, size and shape of plant material shall conform to FDOA
Ref 1 and Ref 2. Where size exceeds that indicated in FDOA Ref 1 or Ref 2, the ball size
shall be proportionally larger.
B.
Plant material shall be Florida No. 1 or better. Plants shall have outstanding form;
symmetrical, heavily branched with an even branch distribution, densely foliated and/or
budded, and a strong, straight, distinct leader where this is a characteristic of the species.
Plants shall possess a normal balance between height and spread. The Landscape
Architect will be the final arbiter of the acceptability of plant form.
C.
Plants shall meet the size requirements indicated on the plant list. Plants larger or smaller
than specified may be used only if accepted by the Landscape Architect.
D.
Where a caliper or size range is specified, at least 50% of the material shall be closer to
the top of the range stated.
PLANTING SOIL
A
Planting soil shall be a mixture of 33% sand 33% topsoil (stockpiled on site) and 34%
muck, by volume.
B.
Sand: sand shall be a well washed, medium to coarse sand free of silt and sludge.
Cyclone sand is not acceptable.
C.
Muck: Peat shall be peat material removed from areas marked "Florida Everglades Peat"
on Soil Conservation Service Soils Maps. Muck shall be suitable for plant growth,
capable of sustaining vigorous plant growth, and specifically pulverized for agricultural
TREES, PALMS, SHRUBS AND GROUNDCOVERS
32 90 00 - 2
use. Florida peat shall be free of deleterious materials that would be harmful to plant
growth, shall be free of nematodes, shall be uniform in quality, and shall have a pH of
between 5.5 and 6.5 as determined by ASTM E70. Muck shall be sterilized to make it
free of all viable nut grasses and other undesirable weeds.
D.
2.03
Before planting materials are installed, test planting soil and amend planting soil as
recommended by the Testing Laboratory such that planting soil pH falls within the range
of 5.5 to 6.5 ph.
SOIL MOISTURIZER
A.
Soil Moisturizer: Soil moisturizer shall be equal to "Terrasorb" soil moisturizer,
manufactured by Industrial Services International, Bradenton, FL.
1.
2.04
Proportions: Planting soil shall be amended by the addition of soil moisturizer in
the following amounts:
a.
For trees and palms up to 36 in. dia. root ball: Use one 3 oz. packet.
b.
For trees and palms with root ball larger than 36 in. dia.: Use two 3 oz.
packets.
c.
For bedding areas: Use one 3 oz. packet for every 20 sq. ft. of planting area
with packets placed at 3 ft. depth, or as deep as practicable.
COMMERCIAL FERTILIZER
A.
Fertilizer content shall conform to the following:
Constituent
Nitrogen(N)
Phosphorus(P)
Potassium(K)
% Present by Weight
12
2
8
(at least 50% in slow release form)
(at least 50% in slow release form)
1.
At least 50% of nitrogen shall be derived from slow-release (polymer coated)
sulfur-coated urea.
2.
Available phosphorus shall be derived from superphosphate, bone meal, or
tankage.
3.
At least 50% of potassium shall be derived from slow-release (polymer coated)
sulfur-coated potassium.
4.
Product shall contain at least 4% magnesium sulfate, derived from Kieserite.
TREES, PALMS, SHRUBS AND GROUNDCOVERS
32 90 00 - 3
5.
Product shall contain the micronutrients iron (chelated with EDTA), manganese
sulfate, copper, zinc, boron, and sulfur.
B.
Fertilizer shall be delivered in manufacturer's standard container printed with
manufacturer's name, material weight and guaranteed analysis.
C.
Controlled-release fertilizer shall be equal to the following:
Product
Manufacturer
12-2-8 Landscape Mix
Diamond R Fertilizer Company
18375 S.W 260 Street
Homestead, FL 33031
Agriform 20-10-5
Planting Tablets
2.05
BIOSTIMULANTS
A.
Biostimulants shall be Die Hard Transplant or equal and shall contain miccorhizal fungi.
1.
2.06
Sierra Chemical Co
Milpitas, CA 95035
Proportions: Planting soil shall be amended by the addition of biostimulants in
the following amounts:
a.
For trees and palms up to 36 in. dia. root ball: Use one 8 oz. packet.
b.
For trees and palms with root ball larger than 36 in. dia.: Use two 8 oz.
packets.
MULCH
A.
Mulches: Mulch shall be Florimulch or approved equal. Approved equal shall follow
the following specification:
1.
During processing, raw materials shall be stacked and stored in curing piles for
no less than 120 days.
2.
Mulch shall be made entirely from the above ground portion wood and bark of
the Melaleuca Quinquenervia Tree. It shall not contain more than 10% (by
volume) bark and shall not contain roots or root pieces. Shreds and chips shall
not be larger than 3/4 inch diameter and 1 1/2 inch in length. Mulch shall be free
of weed seeds, soil and on other organic or inorganic material.
3.
Prior to its final processing, mulch will have been inspected and certified by the
Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services, Division of Plant
Industry, as free of burrowing nematodes. All proofs of delivery shall bear the
official State of Florida stamp of inspection and verification.
TREES, PALMS, SHRUBS AND GROUNDCOVERS
32 90 00 - 4
2.07
2.08
GUYING AND STAKING MATERIALS
A.
Wood Stakes: Straight, sound, rough sawn lumber not less than 2 x 4 in.
B.
Black Webbing Tape: as supplied by Terra International, Inc., Miami, Florida, Landscape
Supplies, Miami, Florida or approved equal.
C.
Deadmen: Sound, rough sawn lumber 2 x 4 in., 12 in. long or other material approved by
the Landscape Architect.
WEED CONTROL FABRIC
A.
Weed control fabric shall be Pro5 Weed Barrier by Dewitt or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION OF SUBGRADE
A.
3.02
DRAINAGE OF SOILS
A.
3.03
Individual tree and palm (as per plant list on the drawings) locations and outlines of shrub
and groundcover areas to be planted shall be staked by the Contractor in ample time to
allow inspection by the Landscape Architect.
PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE
A.
3.05
The Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect, in writing, of all soil or drainage
conditions that he considers detrimental to growth of plant material. Submit proposal and
cost estimate for correction of the conditions for \architects approval before starting
work.
LAYOUT OF PLANTING AREAS
A.
3.04
Examine subgrade and rough grade before planting. Alert Landscape Architect to
unacceptable rough grading or subgrade.
Subgrade of planting areas shall be loosened or scarified to a minimum depth of 3 in.
prior to spreading planting soil. Subgrade shall be brought to true and uniform grade and
shall be cleared of stones greater than 2 in., sticks, and other extraneous material.
PLANT PIT EXCAVATION
A.
Planting pits for trees, palms, shrubs and groundcovers shall be excavated to the depth
and dimension indicated on the Drawings.
TREES, PALMS, SHRUBS AND GROUNDCOVERS
32 90 00 - 5
3.06
SPREADING OF PLANTING SOIL
A.
3.07
3.08
PLANTING
A.
Plants shall be set as indicated on Drawings. Plants shall have same relationship to finish
grade as in the nursery.
B.
Mix 1/2 required quantity of soil moisturizer evenly in plant pit. Mix remaining 1/2 in
backfill for hole. Soil shall be worked carefully into voids and pockets, tamping lightly
every 6 in..
APPLICATION OF FERTILIZER
A.
3.09
Each tree and palm shall be staked or guyed immediately after planting. Plants shall stand
plumb after staking or guying. (See drawings for staking details)
MULCHING
A.
3.14
Immediately after planting, all trunks of deciduous trees shall be sprayed with fungicide,
applied as directed by the chemical manufacturer.
STAKING AND GUYING
A.
3.11
Fertilizer tablets shall be applied when planting pits are backfilled two thirds full.
Fertilizer shall be of the type, rate, and timing recommended by the Testing Laboratory to
promote and maintain healthy growth for each plant type.
FUNGICIDE SPRAYING
A.
3.10
Planting soil shall be spread and placed to required depths.
Apply 3 inches of mulch to all planted areas.
MAINTENANCE OF PLANTING
A.
Maintenance shall begin immediately after each plant is planted and shall continue until
Final Acceptance.
END OF SECTION 32 90 00
TREES, PALMS, SHRUBS AND GROUNDCOVERS
32 90 00 - 6
SECTION 32 92 23 - SODDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to perform the sodding work, complete,
as indicated on the Drawings and as specified.
1.02
RELATED WORK
A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect the work of this Section. Other
Specifications Sections that relate directly to work of this Section include, but are not limited to:
1.
2.
1.03
Section 32 84 00, Irrigation
Section 32 90 00, Trees, Palms, Shrubs and Groundcover
REFERENCES
A.
Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards
conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern.
1.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
D 1557 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soils Aggregate Mixture
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Test report of the topsoil shall be submitted to the Architect. Report shall include
recommendations on the type of quantity of additives required to achieve the required pH
and nutrients to maintain healthy sod growth.
C.
Provide the following certificates:
D.
Grass species, and location of field from which sod is cut.
2.
Certification from Florida Department of Agriculture.
3.
Compliance with state and federal quarantine restrictions.
4.
Manufacturer's certification of fertilizer and herbicide composition.
Maintenance Instruction:
1.
SODDING
1.
Prior to the end of the maintenance period, furnish two copies of written maintenance
instructions to the Owner and one copy to the Landscape Architect for maintenance and care
of the lawn areas throughout a full growing season.
32 92 23 - 1
1.05
CONTRACTOR'S INSPECTION AND TESTING
A.
Testing, analysis, and inspection required by the Contractor for his own information or guidance
shall be at his own expense.
B.
The Contractor shall engage an independent testing agency, acceptable to the Architect, to perform
the following tests and analysis:
Material
Topsoil
1.
1.06
Tests and Analysis Required
Determination of pH, organic content, and nutrient content.
Recommendations shall be made by the testing agency as to
the type and quantity of soil additives required to bring
nutrient content and pH to satisfactory levels for planting.
Materials shall not be used in construction until test results have been reviewed by the
Architect.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
B.
SODDING
Cutting
1.
Do not cut sod at the nursery or other approved source until ready to transport sod to the
Project site or approved storage location.
2.
Before stripping, sod shall be mowed at a uniform height of 2 inches.
3.
Cut sod to specified thickness and to standard width and length desired.
Transporting
1.
Deliver sod on pallets. Protect sod against dehydration, contamination and heating during
transport and delivery. Sod transported to the Project site in open vehicles shall be covered
with tarpaulins or other suitable covers securely fastened to the body of the vehicle to
prevent injury to the sod material and to protect root system from exposure to wind or sun.
Closed vehicles shall be adequately ventilated to prevent overheating of the sod. Evidence of
inadequate protection against drying out in transit shall be the cause for rejection.
2.
Sod shall be kept moist, fresh, and protected at all times, under shade or covered with
moistened burlap. Such protection shall encompass the entire period during which the sod is
in transit, being handled, or in temporary storage. Do not pile sod more than 2 ft. deep.
3.
Upon arrival at the temporary storage location or the site of the work, sod shall be inspected
for proper shipping procedures. Should the roots be dried out, the Landscape Architect will
reject the sod. When sod has been rejected, the contractor shall remove it at once from the
area of the work and replace it.
4.
Unless otherwise authorized by the Landscape Architect, the Contractor shall notify the
Architect at least 48 hours in advance of the anticipated delivery date of sod material. A
legible copy of the invoice, showing species and variety of sod included for each shipment
shall be submitted to the Architect. Certificate of Inspection when required must accompany
each sod shipment.
32 92 23 - 2
C.
D.
Storage of Sod
1.
Do not deliver more sod than can be installed within 24 hours.
2.
Sod shall be kept moist and shall be stored in a compact group to prevent drying out.
Handling of Sod
1.
E.
1.07
1.08
Contractor shall take extreme care in the handling of sod material to avoid breaking,
stretching, tearing or dropping strips. Sod that has been damaged by poor handling may be
rejected by the Architect.
Deliver fertilizer in sealed waterproof bags, printed with manufacturer's name, weight, and
guaranteed analysis.
JOB CONDITIONS
A.
Begin installation of sod after preceding related work is accepted.
B.
Install sod during months acceptable to the Landscape Architect.
C.
Do not install sod on saturated soil.
D.
Protection: Erect signs and barriers against vehicular traffic.
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A.
B.
SODDING
Acceptance:
1.
The Landscape Architect will inspect all work for Substantial Completion upon written
request of the Contractor. The request shall be received at least ten calendar days before the
anticipated date of inspection.
2.
Acceptance of material by the Landscape Architect will be for general conformance to
specified requirements, and shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for full
conformance to the Contract Documents.
3.
Upon completion and re-inspection of all repairs or renewals necessary in the judgement of
the Landscape Architect, the Architect will recommend to the Owner that the work of this
Section be accepted as Substantially Complete.
Sod areas will be accepted when in compliance with all the following conditions:
1.
Roots are thoroughly knit to the soil;
2.
Absence of visible joints (sodded areas);
3.
All areas show a uniform stand of specified grass in healthy condition;
32 92 23 - 3
4.
1.09
1.10
1.11
Absence of lumps after several applications of top dressing and rolling of sod
GUARANTEE
A.
Guarantee sod for a period of three months after date of Substantial Completion.
B.
Replacement sod under this guarantee shall be guaranteed for an additional three months from the
date of installation.
C.
Repair any damage caused by sod replacement at no cost to the Owner.
QUALITY GUARANTEE
A.
Sod shall be uniform in color, leaf texture, leaf and root density, and free from weeds, diseases, and
other visible imperfections at acceptance.
B.
Guarantee does not cover damage as a result of fertilizers, pesticides, or other applications by the
owner and not supervised by the Contractor or as a result of acts of God or vandalism.
MAINTENANCE
A.
Maintain as described in PART 3 of this section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
SOD
A.
Sod shall be nursery grown or cultivated mineral agricultural soils. Sod shall have been mowed
regularly and carefully and otherwise maintained from planting to harvest.
1.
Grass Species:
St Augustine
B.
Thickness of Cut: Sod shall be machine cut at a uniform soil thickness of 5/8 in. Measurement for
thickness shall exclude top growth and thatch.
C.
Strip Size: Sod shall be cut to the supplier's standard width and length. Maximum allowable
deviation from standard widths and lengths shall be plus or minus 1/2 in. on width and plus or
minus 5% on length. Broken strips and torn or uneven ends will not be accepted.
D.
Strength of Sod Strips: Sod strips shall be strong enough to support their own weight and retain
their size and shape if suspended vertically when grasped in the upper 10% of the section.
E.
Moisture Content: Sod shall not be harvested or transplanted when moisture content (excessively
dry or wet) may adversely affect its survival.
F.
Time Limitations: Sod shall be harvested, delivered, and transplanted within a 30 hour period
unless a suitable preservation method is approved by the Architect prior to delivery. Sod not
transplanted within this period shall be inspected and approved by the Architect prior to its
32 92 23 - 4
SODDING
installation.
2.02
2.03
2.04
G.
Thatch: Sod shall be relatively free of thatch. A maximum of 1/2 in. (uncompressed) thatch will be
permitted.
H.
Diseases, Nematodes, and Insects: Sod shall be free of diseases, nematodes, and soil-borne insects.
State Nursery and Plant Materials Laws require that all sod
be inspected and approved for sale. The inspection and approval must be made by the State
Agricultural Department, Office of the State Entomologist.
I.
Weeds: Sod shall be free of objectionable grassy and broad leaf weeds.
SOIL MATERIALS
A.
Sand: sand shall be a well washed, medium to coarse sand free of silt and sludge. Cyclone sand is
not acceptable.
B.
Muck: Muck shall be peat material removed from areas marked "Florida Everglades Peat" on Soil
Conservation Service Soils Maps. Muck shall be suitable for plant growth, capable of sustaining
vigorous plant growth, and specifically pulverized for agricultural use. Florida peat shall be free of
deleterious materials that would be harmful to plant growth, shall be free of nematodes, shall be
uniform in quality, and shall have a pH of between 5.5 and 6.5 as determined by ASTM E70. Muck
shall be sterilized to make it free of all viable nut grasses and other undesirable weeds.
SOIL MIX
A.
Soil mix shall be 33% coarse sand, 33% Topsoil (stockpiled on site) and 34% muck.
B.
Before sod is installed, or seed applied, test planting soil and amend as recommended by the
Testing Laboratory such that planting soil ph falls within the range of 5.5 to 6.5 ph.
WATER
A.
2.05
Free of substances harmful to plant growth, objectionable odor or staining agents.
COMMERCIAL FERTILIZER
A.
Fertilizer content shall conform to the following:
Constituent
Nitrogen(N)
Phosphorus(P)
Potassium(K)
SODDING
% Present by Weight
12
2
8
(at least 50% in slow release form)
(at least 50% in slow release form)
1.
At least 50% of nitrogen shall be derived from slow-release (polymer coated) sulfurcoated urea.
2.
Available phosphorus shall be derived from superphosphate, bone meal, or tankage.
3.
At least 50% of potassium shall be derived from slow-release (polymer coated) sulfur32 92 23 - 5
coated potassium.
2.06
2.07
4.
Product shall contain at least 4% magnesium sulfate, derived from Kieserite.
5.
Product shall contain the micronutrients iron (chelated with EDTA), manganese sulfate,
copper, zinc, boron, and sulfur.
B.
Fertilizer shall be delivered in manufacturer's standard container printed with manufacturer's
name, material weight and guaranteed analysis.
C.
Controlled-release fertilizer shall be equal to the following:
Product
Manufacturer
12-6-8 Lawn Special
Diamond R Fertilizer Company
18375 S.W 260 Street
Homestead, FL 33031
A.
The chemical designation for granular fertilizer shall be 12-8-8, with at least 50 percent (50%) of
the nitrogen from a non-soluble organic source for all planting.
B.
Apply and distribute by methods and rates as recommended by the manufacturer.
HERBICIDES
A.
Post-emergent Herbicide: Roundup as manufactured by Monsanto Corp. or approved equal.
B.
Pre-emergent Herbicide: Ron-Star or approved equal.
C.
Certify that herbicide and application technique will not damage plant material prior to application,
and replace or repair damage to any plants injured by herbicide application at no cost to the Owner.
SOD PROTECTION
A.
Materials necessary to prevent vehicular access to areas which have received sod or seeding and
signage. Submit shop drawings or cut sheets.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE
A.
Existing subgrade shall be examined to ensure that the rough grading is correct and that suitable
subgrade materials exist prior to start of sodding work. Start of work shall constitute acceptance of
the subgrade.
B.
Existing subgrade shall be loosened or scarified to a minimum depth of 3 in. prior to spreading of
topsoil. Subgrade shall be brought to true and uniform grade, and shall be cleared of stones greater
than 3 in., sticks, and other extraneous material.
SPREADING OF TOPSOIL
SODDING
329223 - 6
3.03
3.04
A.
Areas where sod is to be planted shall have a subgrade 4" lower than the finish grade. A two inch
layer of soil mix shall be added prior to laying of sod.
B.
Soil in areas to receive lawns and grasses shall be fine graded with a drag or rake. Remove sticks,
stones rubbish and extraneous matter. Grading shall round out all breaks in grade, smooth down all
lumps and ridges, and fill in all holes and crevices. Grade shall be maintained until installation of
sod.
WEED CONTROL
A.
Apply post-emergent herbicide per manufacturer's rate and method of application to all areas to
receive sod/seed.
B.
Apply pre-emergent herbicide before sodding and again as necessary throughout required
maintenance period to prevent weed seed germination.
C.
Verify that the herbicide and application technique will not damage sod prior to application, and
replace, and/or repair damage to any sod injured by herbicide at no cost to the Owner.
SODDING
A.
Weather Conditions.
B.
Schedule work for periods of favorable weather.
C.
Sod placement on days which, in the judgment of the Architect, are too hot, sunny, dry, or windy
for optimal installation may be prohibited.
D.
Begin sodding at the bottom of slopes.
E.
Lay first row of sod in straight line.
F.
Butt side and end joints. Ensure that joints are tight, thereby eliminating the need to patch and/or
top dress to eliminate gaps.
G.
Lateral joints shall be staggered.
H.
Do not stretch or overlap rows.
I.
As sodding is completed in any one section, the entire area shall be rolled. Roll sod, except on
pegged areas, with roller weighing no more than 150 lbs. per foot of roller width to eliminate air
pockets. Following tamping, screened topsoil shall be used to fill all cracks and excess soil shall be
worked into the sod with rakes or other suitable equipment. Sod shall not be smothered with too
much top dressing of topsoil.
J.
Watering
1.
SODDING
Immediately after top dressing thoroughly water to a depth sufficient that the underside of
the new sod strips and the soil immediately below the sod are thoroughly wet, or a minimum
32 92 23 - 7
of 6 in.
2.
3.06
MAINTENANCE
A.
B.
3.07
Provide an adequate supply of water at the site prior to and during transplanting of the sod.
Maintenance shall consist of protecting, watering, weeding, cutting, fertilizing, repairing of eroded
areas, and resodding, or reseeding which in the opinion of the Landscape Architect is required to
establish a uniform stand of grass.
Mowing
1.
Whenever grass reaches a heights of 3 in., it shall be cut back to 2 in. Clippings shall be
removed.
2.
After two mowings, the Contractor shall top dress the sod with an application of fertilizer at
the rate of 1 pound of actual nitrogen per 1000 square feet.
CLEANING
A.
Immediately clean spills from paved and finish surface areas.
B.
Remove debris and excess materials from project site.
C.
Dispose of protective barricades and warning signs at the termination of lawn establishment.
END OF SECTION 32 92 23
SODDING
32 92 23 - 8
SECTION 32 96 43 - TREE TRANSPLANT
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Labor, materials, necessary equipment and services to complete the tree
relocation work.
B.
Related Section:
1.
2.
1.2
1.3
REFERENCES
A.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Z60.1 American Standard for Nursery
Stock.
B.
Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services: “Grades and Standards for
Nursery Plants”, latest edition.
C.
Tree Care Industry Association (TCIA)
D.
IFAS Extension – University of Florida – “Transplanting Palms” - Alan W. Meerow and
Timothy K. Broschat.
DESCRIPTION
A.
Relocate existing trees and/or palms to a proposed location.
B.
Remove other vegetation as necessary and as directed by the Landscape Architect to
accommodate new plantings. Prepare areas to be planted according to Section 32 90 00.
C.
Resulting tree pits of relocated material shall be backfilled with clean fill and brought
back flush with surrounding grade, unless the pits are to be immediately replanted.
Stabilize grade if required. Correct problems caused by erosion, wind, etc., in the
reclaimed area. Pits to be quickly replanted shall be surrounded by safety barricades to
prevent accidental falls into pits.
1.
1.4
01 56 39 – Tree Protection
32 90 00 – Trees, Palms, Shrubs and Groundcovers
In areas where new plant material will replace relocated plant material,
appropriate planting soil mix shall be used as backfill.
SUBMITTALS
TREE TRANSPLANT
32 96 43 - 1
A.
Submit a list of equipment, procedure, and labor force anticipated for use for tree
relocation for approval by the Landscape Architect.
B.
Submit a schedule by day indicating units to be dug and relocated. Note materials
requiring root pruning, and that the relocation schedule is to begin at the end of the
specified root pruning period.
C.
Obtain permits required by authority having jurisdiction.
D.
Submit written certification that trees indicated to remain have been protected during the
course of construction according to Section 01 56 39. Certify that where damage did
occur:
1.
2.
1.5
1.6
Trees were promptly and properly treated.
Indicate which damaged trees (if any) are incapable of retaining full growth
potential and are recommended to be replaced.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The Contractor's crew used for the relocation of existing trees shall have minimum 10
years experience in relocation of existing plant materials and be recognized by the
American Association of Nurserymen.
B.
Unless otherwise specified, tree transplanting shall comply with TCIA.
C.
Comply with American National Standards Institute A-300 standard, 2001 for pruning
and removing branches from trees to remain to clear of new construction and for
relocation.
D.
Canopy pruning should only be done as needed to facilitate the move (for logistics only)
and it should be minimal. No topping or cutting back. However, in some species,
stripping of the leaves is still done/recommended, i.e. yellow tabs and cabbage palms
(pruning), to reduce evapotranspiration rates.
E.
Perform tree repair work for damage incurred by new construction.
F.
Provide routine progress evaluation reports on relocated trees until the end of the
maintenance period.
G.
Evaluate existing trees and verify trees are free of disease and ready to survive relocation
from the site to their new location on-site or off-site.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
TREE TRANSPLANT
32 96 43 - 2
A.
Properly handle trees and palms during moving so trunks will not be scarred or damaged
and to avoid broken limbs. Broken limbs not causing the tree to be rejected shall be
repaired as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.7
1.8
Properly prune dead, dying, or damaged branches with clean, sharp equipment.
Remove injured bark and wood of a tree would with a clean, sharp knife to a
point where healthy bark and wood make contact at their margins.
Inspect and treat wound for insect and disease.
Seal wounds with bituminous base wound paint for all oak limbs greater than 3
inch diameter.
B.
Transport trees on vehicles of adequate size to prevent overcrowding, broken limbs,
foliage damage, or root ball damage.
C.
Keep root balls moist during relocation.
D.
Protect tree crowns with shade cloth to prevent desiccation and wind burn. Crowns shall
be periodically sprayed with water to help ensure against desiccation.
E.
Handle plant material only in ways and means accepted by the landscaping industry and
accepted by the Landscape Architect.
F.
Plant material shall be planted the same day it is dug. Coordinate preparation of planting
pits or beds to ensure this schedule.
MAINTENANCE
A.
Maintain relocated plant materials immediately after each item is planted and continued
until project is completed, upon which time the Owner will take over maintenance of
materials following procedures and recommendations of contractor and specifications.
B.
During the maintenance period, maintain relocated plant materials according to
procedures described in Section 32 90 00.
WARRANTY
A.
All relocated plant material shall be guaranteed for a period of one year.
1.
B.
PART 2
For relocated trees or palms that die, replace their canopy area with new trees in
accordance with the requirements of the City of Miami Tree Ordinance.
Repair damage to other plants and lawn or construction work within the relocation area
during tree transplantation at no cost to the Owner. This includes, but is not limited to,
damage to curbs, walks, roads, fences, site furnishings, etc.
PRODUCTS
TREE TRANSPLANT
32 96 43 - 3
2.1 MATERIALS
A.
Peat moss, topsoil, planting soil, mulch, staking, and guying, shall be as specified in section 32
90 00..
B.
Fill materials shall be as specified in Section 32 90 00.
2.2
FERTILIZER
A.
PART 3
Minor Element Mix shall be “Micro Mix” liquid as produced by Lesco, Inc., to be diluted at a
rate of 1 gallon per 100 gallons of water and applied at a rate of 50 gallons per 1000 square
feet of canopy, or “Iron Roots” applied as per manufacturer’s instructions, or approved equal.
EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION PRIOR TO TRANSPLANTING
A.
Crown Pruning
1.
Crown pruning shall be completed a minimum of 14 days prior to root pruning. Pruning
technique shall be as follows:
a.
b.
Broadleaf Trees shall be trimmed by thinning the crown only, and not reducing the
crown dimensions, unless directed by Landscape Architect. Interior suckers growth
and dead wood shall be first removed, followed by selective pruning of branches
and limbs. Limbs that cross through the tree crown shall be removed before other
limbs are removed. Pruning shall not destroy the form of the tree. All cuts shall be
made flush, smooth and contoured to the tree limbs or trunk.
Sabal Palms: Remove all seed pods and all fronds, as in a hurricane cut. Trim all
boots to a clean and regular pattern, no more than 3" from trunk.
2. Repair any existing injuries to tree including cavities and machinery marks.
3. Notice shall be given to the Landscape Architect 48 hours before pruning is carried out.
B.
Watering and Fertilization
1. Clear the root ball area of all foreign material, trash, etc. to expose undisturbed soil.
2. Trees shall be deep injection fertilized within 24 hours after crown pruning, a minimum of
10 days prior to root pruning. Specified liquid fertilizer shall be used and applied at the
concentration and application rates stated herein.
3. Mix suspendable powdered fertilizer and minor element mix to produce a single fluid with
each component included at the specified concentration. Inject into root zone within the
limits of proposed rootball at the rate of 50 gallons fluid per 1,000 square feet of tree canopy,
using only approved spray equipment.
TREE TRANSPLANT
32 96 43 - 4
4. Trees to be root pruned shall be watered two weeks prior to root severance. During this
period, the soil moisture in the root zone shall be maintained at an optimum level for growth.
This is interpreted to mean that two (2) to three (3) inches shall be applied to the root zone
(20-30 gallons per tree) each week to achieve deep watering of the area.
C.
Root Pruning
1.
Beginning at least 12 weeks prior to tree relocation, the hardwood trees to be relocated
shall have their roots pruned such that the diameter of the root system is equal or
greater than 0.75 foot for each 1 inch of trunk diameter.
Rootballs shall be a minimum of 36” except for Sabal Palms
Root pruning shall be performed in two operations, with two opposite sides pruned
first and then the remaining two sides pruned 4 to 6 weeks later.
Root ball depth shall be at least 36 inches. Allowances shall be made for field
adjustments regarding rootball size and depth.
Root pruning shall be performed using a stump-grinder or more refined equipment
such that cuts are clean, smooth and thorough without cuts or tears in the bark, wood
or cambium.
Palms to be relocated may require root pruning depending on species, size and
condition. Root pruning, root ball size and other relevant factors to be determined by
a Certified Arborist.
Trees growing in rocky soild shall be dug and relocated with the roots attached to a
section of native rock without separating them, such that the roots remain intact. Root
pruning and trenching shall be adjusted for this condition.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
Backfilling Trench:
1. All trenches are to be backfilled with approved planting soil and flooded to remove air
pockets. Fill entire trench.
2. Re-establish a 6" berm, 12" outside the root pruning trench using excavated soil.
E.
Bracing and Guying of Trees After Root Pruning: Bracing or guying at time of severing roots
shall be provided if required to support trees during the root regeneration period. Such work
shall provide stability and support to the extent that trees are maintained in a vertical position for
duration of the root regeneration period.
F.
Mulching: Spread approved mulch 3" thick within the bermed area.
G.
Watering After Root Pruning
1.
Watering after root pruning shall be daily at high volume.
2.
Watering shall be accomplished by a water truck, or by on-site water supply as
required to provide sufficient quantity and pressure.
3.
Watering shall continue until the root generation period is over.
TREE TRANSPLANT
32 96 43 - 5
H.
Root generation Period
1.
3.2
45 days minimum.
TRANSPLANTING OPERATION
B.
Transplanting shall consist of on-site or off-site transplanting of existing trees or palms from
proposed construction areas to permanent positions as noted on the drawings.
C.
Digging, Wrapping, and Handling: Plants shall be dug and prepared for moving in a manner that
will not cause damage to branches, shape, root system, and development.
D.
Balled and Burlapped Plants:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Balls shall be firmly wrapped with burlap or accepted cloth substitute.
No balled plant will be acceptable if the ball is cracked and broken or if the stem
or trunk is loose in the ball, either before or during transplanting.
Balled plants shall be lifted and handled from the bottom of the ball.
Transport plant material on vehicles of adequate size to prevent overcrowding,
broken limbs, foliage damage or root damage.
Root ball and foliage shall be kept moist during all phases of relocation.
Protect ball and deliver to the site, plant immediately, and water thoroughly.
3.3 PLANTING
A.
Relocated Material:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Relocated trees/palms shall be planted according to procedures described for new
material, Section 32 90 00. Verify final grades have been established before planting
operations. Ensure proposed planting pits drain by test-filling with water before
transplantation.
Setting of Plants: All trees shall be centered in the hole as indicated in section 32 90
00. During backfilling, a hose with water running at a slow rate shall be used to
"puddle in" the soil. Rod-in the water-soil mix to assure that all air pockets are
eliminated. If tree settles, Contractor must reset to proper level.
Brace designated material according to procedures described for new plant
materials, Section 32 90 00.
Placement of Mulch: A 3" layer of mulch shall be placed around the base of the
trees but not touching the tree trunk. Trees shall have a blanket of mulch that covers
the area of the planting pit. Where trees are planted in masses, the total area below
the tree group shall be mulched.
Feed with a diluted solution of N-P-K in solution form with a soil needle, providing
water, air, and nutrients.
3.4 WATERING
TREE TRANSPLANT
32 96 43 - 6
A.
Provide manual watering of relocated plant materials for 90 days. If used, after watering
period, Contractor shall be responsible for the complete removal of all temporary watering
systems.
B.
Following relocation, water trees daily for the first two weeks, every other day for the next
three weeks, and every third day for the balance of the three-month watering/maintenance
period. Such watering shall thoroughly saturate the root ball to its full depth.
C.
For canopy trees that larger than 20' a temporary over head irrigation shall be installed as
follows:
1.
3.5
Each tree shall have a sprinkler head installed above the canopy using flexible
tubing. Tubing can be attached to trees with flex ties. Contractor shall submit shop
drawings prior to beginning work.
CLEANING
A.
Cleaning up the Site:
1.
2.
3.
Upon completion of the work, thoroughly clean up the project site.
In addition to removing equipment, unused materials, deleterious material, and
surplus excavated material, the Contractor shall fine grade all disturbed areas and
the areas adjacent to the transplanted material to provide a neat and uniform site.
All damaged or altered existing structures, as a result of the landscape work, shall
be corrected.
END OF SECTION 32 96 43
TREE TRANSPLANT
32 96 43 - 7
SECTION 331000 – WATER UTILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SCOPE OF WORK
This Section includes but is not limited to the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
1.2
A.
Water distribution piping and fittings complete.
Water valves, boxes, backflow preventers, appurtenances and incidentals; water meters by
others.
Furnishing, installation and testing of the above.
Unless specifically otherwise specified, all water distribution system work shall be performed in
strict accordance with Miami-Dade Water and Sewer Department (WASD) Standards and
Specifications.
SUBMITTALS:
In general, the following data and shop drawings shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for
approval prior to construction:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Mill Test Certificates or Certified Test Reports on Pipe
Details of Restrained and Flexible Joints
Meter Vaults and Covers
Valves and Valve Boxes
Fire Hydrant Assemblies
Backflow Prevention Devices
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Ductile Iron Pipe: Ductile iron pipe shall conform to the requirements of ANSI Standard A21.51,
Class 52 for all sizes up to 8-inches; Class 50 for sizes larger than 8-inches, unless otherwise
specified. Joints for ductile iron pipe shall be mechanical or push on joints and conform to ANSI
A21.11. Pipe interior shall have a bituminous seal coat over a cement mortar lining conforming to
ANSI Standard A21.4.
B.
Fittings: All ductile iron fittings shall be mechanical joint or single gasket, push on type with a
minimum pressure rating of 150 psi, and shall conform to the requirements of ANSI A21.10.
Fittings shall be cement lined, seal coated and outside coated as specified above for ductile iron
pipe.
C.
Joints: Mechanical joints consisting of bell, socket, gland gasket, bolts and nuts shall conform to
ANSI A21.11. Bolts shall be high strength, annealed, cast iron, or high strength low alloy steel, Thead type having hexagonal nuts. Bolts and nuts shall be machined true and nuts shall be tapped at
right angles to a smooth bearing surface. Single seal gasket push on type joints shall conform to
the requirements of ANSI A21.11 and shall be "Tyton", "Fastite", "Super Bell Tite", or approved
equal.
WATER UTILITIES
331000 - 1
D.
2.2
Gaskets: Gaskets shall be of vulcanized crude rubber or polyvinyl chloride plastisol. Gaskets shall
have plain tips unless otherwise specified.
GALVANIZED STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Steel pipe, except as otherwise specified, shall be Schedule 40 galvanized seamless steel pipe
conforming to either ASTM Standard A53, "Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated
Welded and Seamless" Type S, Grade A or B, or to ASTM Standard A120, "Pipe, Steel, Black and
Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless, for Ordinary Uses", Type S. Black
steel pipe may be used in fabricating items which are to be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
B.
Screwed fittings shall be 150 psi galvanized malleable iron, and shall conform to ANSI Standard
B16.3. Screwed unions shall be galvanized steel or galvanized malleable iron with ground brass
seats. Threads shall be ANSI Standard B2.1, NPT. Joint compound shall be used on all threaded
joints, applied to the mate threads only.
2.3
VALVES AND VALVE BOXES
A.
Gate Valves: Gate valves 3" and larger shall be iron body, bronze mounted, double disc, parallel or
inclined seats, non-rising stem, 2-inch square nut operated, mechanical joint and/or single gasket,
push-on type gate valves designed to meet the requirements of the AWWA Specification C550,
latest revision. Valves shall open to the left (counter-clockwise). Valves up to and including size
12 inches shall have an "O" ring type pressure seal.
B.
Valve Boxes: Slip type valve boxes, of the same type used by the Miami-Dade Water and Sewer
Department, shall be carefully centered and set flush with the finished grade and held in position by
a 30-inch diameter by 8-inch thick ring of concrete poured under the support flange.
C.
Gate valves smaller than 3 inches in size, otherwise noted on the drawings, shall be 150 lbs., all
bronze, wedge disc, non-rising stem with hand wheels, screwed bonnet, Crane No. 437 or an
approved equal. Valve stem extensions and cast iron slip type valve boxes of the same type used
by Miami-Dade Water and Sewer Department shall be provided where needed.
2.4
A.
2.5
A.
CORPORATION STOPS
Corporation stops shall be brass, equipped with connections compatible with the connecting service
pipe type, threaded in accordance with AWWA Standard C800, and as manufactured by Mueller
Co., Decatur, I11., or an approved equal.
MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
Other items necessary for the complete installation and not specified herein shall conform to the
details and notes shown on the Drawings. All minor items implied, included or required for the
construction of a complete operational system shall be installed whether shown on the detail
drawings or not.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
HANDLING AND CUTTING PIPE
Every care shall be taken in handling and laying pipe and fittings to avoid scratching, marring
surfaces, abrasion or the coating or otherwise damaging the pipe.
WATER UTILITIES
331000 - 2
B.
Any cracked fitting or any pipe fitting which has received a severe blow that may have caused an
incipient fracture, even though no such fracture can be seen shall be marked rejected and removed
at once from the work.
C.
In any pipe showing a distinct crack and in which it is believed there is no incipient fracture
beyond the limits of the visible crack, the cracked portion, if so approved, may be cut off by and at
the expense of the Contractor before the pipe is laid so that the pipe may be perfectly sound. The
cut shall be made in the sound barrel at a point at least 12 inches from the visible limits of the
crack.
D.
Except as otherwise approved, all cutting shall be done with a machine having rolling wheel cutters
or knives adopted to the purpose. All cut ends shall be examined for possible cracks caused by
cutting.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Installation of cast iron pipe and fittings shall be in accordance with AWWA Specification C600,
latest revision.
B.
Trenching shall be in conformance with Section 312000 of these Specifications.
C
Single seal gasket push-on joints may be made underwater.
D.
Pipe Bedding
1.
The bottom of the trench shall be shaped to give uniform support for each pipe. The trench
bottom shall be cut to fit the lower circular third of the pipe.
2.
Each sections of pipes shall be uniformly supported for the full length of its barrel with
recesses excavated to accommodate bells and joints.
3.
The Contractor shall lay pipe in conformance with the bidding details shown on the
drawings.
If pipe is laid in water, the trench bottom, shall be over-excavated 9 inches and the
pipe shall
be bedded and cradled on and in clean graded gravel or pea rock.
E.
Alignment
1.
Pipe and fittings shall be laid accurately to the lines and grades indicated on the lines and
grades indicated on the drawings or as required by special field conditions. Care shall be
taken to ensure a good alignment both horizontally and vertically and to give the pipe a firm
bearing along its entire length.
2.
When bell and spigot pipe or similar pipe is laid, the bell of the pipe shall be cleaned and
wiped out before the cleaned and prepared spigot of the next pipe is inserted into properly
seated and held securely until the joint has been completed.
3.
No defective pipe or fittings shall be laid or placed in the system and any piece discovered to
be defective after having been laid, shall be removed and replaced by a sound and
satisfactory piece.
4.
Each pipe and fitting shall be cleaned of all debris, dirt, etc., before being laid and shall be
kept clean until accepted in the complete work.
F.
Temporary plugs
1.
At all times when pipe laying is not actually in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be
closed
by temporary watertight plugs or by other approved means.
2.
If water is in the trench when work is resumed the plug shall not be removed until all danger
of foreign matter entering the pipe has passed.
WATER UTILITIES
331000 - 3
G.
Where single seal gasket type joints are used, bronze wedges shall be inserted in the joint at
opposite sides on the spring line.
H.
All water meter assemblies shall be in accordance with Miami-Dade Water and Sewer Department
standards.
I.
Thrust Blocks: The Contractor shall furnish and install all support necessary to hold piping and
appurtenances in a firm, substantial manner.
J.
Backfilling shall be in conformance with Section 02221 of these Specifications.
3.3
A.
3.4
A.
CLEANING AND FLUSHING
Upon the completion of the pipe installation for any section, the mains shall be thoroughly flushed;
and, care shall be taken to dispose of the water without causing a nuisance or property damage.
TESTING AND INSPECTION
All components of water systems including mains, fittings, connections, service connections and
valves, shall remain uncovered until tested and accepted; provided, however, that pipe trenches
under traveled roads may be backfilled with the permission of the Architect/Engineer. No testing
shall be done until all concrete thrust blocks are in place and set. In testing, the system shall be
filled with water and subjected to a sustained pressure of 150 pounds per square inch. Piping to be
tested in sections, thereby testing each gate valve for secure closure. While the system is being
filled, air shall be carefully and completely exhausted. Thrust blocking shall have been in place 5
days before subjected to testing operations. All expenses for tests shall be borne by the Contractor.
Testing of water mains shall be performed in accordance with requirements of Miami-Dade Water
& Sewer Department; and, shall be performed in the presence of Department personnel.
B.
Sterilization:
1.
Disinfection of the water mains and appurtenances and bacteriological testing shall be in
accordance with the latest revision of AWWA Specification C601.
2.
The sterilization agent shall be free chlorine in aqueous solution, with sustained
concentration for 12 hours or more of not less than 50 parts per million. Chlorine may be derived
from chlorine gas or 70 percent (high test) calcium hypochlorite (HTH or Perchloron, or equal).
Administration may be by any of the several methods described in Standard Specification
C601. Proposals as to method must be made prior to commencement of the sterilization
process. Following contact with chlorine solution, the system must be thoroughly flushed
out.
3.
Bacteriological testing shall be performed by the Miami-Dade County Health Department.
Contractor shall be responsible for all fees assessed by the Health Department to perform
these tests.
3.5
A.
CONNECTING TO EXISTING SYSTEM
All connections to existing mains of the Miami-Dade Water & Sewer Department shall be made by
or under their direction. Valves separating the mains being installed from existing mains shall be
operated by or under the direction of the Department's representative. The cost of the work by the
Department in making the connection shall be paid for by the Contractor.
WATER UTILITIES
331000 - 4
B.
In the event the proposed main is to be connected to a main which has one or more active services
between the point of connection and the first existing line valve, a temporary plug or cap shall be
installed on the new main until the pressure tests and disinfecting are completed. Upon satisfactory
completion, the cap or plug shall be removed from both mains and the connection made with the
pipe which has been swabbed out with a solution of chlorine and water. The connection shall be
made as swiftly as possible and any water in the ditch shall be kept below the level of the pipe. The
pipeline shall then be placed in service by the Department personnel.
C.
In the event any existing customers will be without water while a connection is being made, the
Contractor shall notify the affected parties when the water will be turned off and when they may
expect service to be resumed. In some instances these connections may have to be made at night.
No customer shall be without water service for more then two hours.
END OF SECTION
WATER UTILITIES
331000 - 5
SECTION 333000 - SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SCOPE OF WORK
This Section includes but is not necessarily limited to the following:
1.
2.
B.
1.2
A.
Underground gravity sanitary sewer pipe and fittings and incidentals, including service
laterals.
Furnishing, installation and testing of the above.
Unless specifically otherwise specified, all sanitary sewer system work shall be performed in
strict accordance with Miami-Dade Water and Sewer Department (WASD) Standards and
Specifications.
SUBMITTALS
In general, the following data and shop drawings shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer
for approval prior to construction:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Manufacturer's Certified Test Report on Castings
Certified Test Records for Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe
Mill Test Certificates on Ductile Iron Pipe
Precast Manhole Shop Drawings
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE
A.
Plastic gravity sewer pipe and fittings shall be unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and
conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation D 3034, SDR-35. The maximum length of
each section of pipe shall be 13 feet. All PVC pipe and fittings shall have a pipe stiffness (PS)
equal to 46 psi minimum and a minimum modulus of elasticity (E) equal to 440,000 psi.
B.
The pipe joint must be the bell and spigot rubber gasket type, in which the bell portion is an
integral portion of the pipe.
C.
PVC pipe and fittings which show signs of ultra-violet degradation will be considered
substandard and unfit for use.
2.2
A.
MANHOLES
Precast concrete manholes shall conform to the Drawings.
manholes shall be minimum strength 4,000 psi.
SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES
Concrete for use in precast
333000 - 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
EXCAVATION
Contractor shall excavate the trench in accordance with the details shown on the drawings, and
as specified in Section 312000 of these Specifications. Width of the trench at one foot above
pipe and below shall be held to the external pipe diameter plus one foot on each side. Trench
shall be excavated and backfilled with select materials to form the elevation required by pipe
bedding.
PIPE LAYING
A.
The bottom of the trench shall be shaped to give substantially uniform circumferential support
to each pipe, along the full length of its barrel. Cut out for bells. Pipe laying shall commence
at the lowest end of the system and proceed upgrade with spigot ends of bell and spigot pipe
pointing in the direction of the flow. Each pipe shall be laid true to line and grade and in such
manner as to form a close concentric joint with adjoining pipe and to prevent sudden offsets of
the flow lines. As the work progresses, the interior of the sewer shall be cleared of all dirt and
superfluous materials of every description. At all times when work is not on progress, all open
ends of pipe and fittings shall be securely closed so that no debris, earth, or other substance will
enter pipe or fittings.
B.
Following placing of one foot of compacted backfill cover above the top of pipe, the pipe shall
be sighted to insure proper grade and alignment. Defects noted shall be immediately dug up
and corrected after which backfilling may proceed to the top of the trench. The Contractor is
required to maintain this condition, insuring against displacement, flotation, etc., so that final
inspection of completed sections will be facilitated.
C.
Where directed by the Architect/Engineer and/or where the sewer crosses a water main a
vertical distance less than 1.5 feet, the Contractor shall install ductile iron pipe for a distance of
ten feet on either side of the point of crossing. All ductile iron pipe shall conform to ANSI
Specification A 21.51, latest revision.
D.
Pipes and appurtenances may be bedded and laid in the dry or in water up to a maximum level
of the current, normal water table, at Contractor's option. If pipe is laid in water, a 9" layer of
well and uniformly graded hard gravel or pea rock shall be used for bedding pipe, and backfill
around pipe up to centerline of pipe shall be the same uniformly graded hard gravel or pea rock.
The gravel or pea rock shall be hard durable stone free of fines not soluble nor subject to
dissolving in water, and subject to approval of the Architect/Engineer.
E.
Contractor may be required to dewater lines and trenches completely at no additional cost to
Owner for inspections and investigations of the work and to locate defects if the work does not
pass all required tests and inspections, including a clear, straight, unobstructed full circle when
sighting lines.
3.3
A.
INSPECTION AND TESTS
All work constructed under this Section of the contract specifications will be subject to visual
inspection for faults, defects, leaks, and all deviations or omissions must be corrected at once.
SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES
333000 - 2
B.
All testing equipment shall be furnished by the Contractor, who shall conduct tests in the
presence of the Architect/Engineer, or his designated representative. Test pressures shall
remain under pressure for the length of time required to inspect the entire piping system and not
less than 4 hours, unless otherwise noted.
C.
All faults discovered as a result of tests shall be remedied and the test repeated.
D.
Tests shall be conducted at such places and with timing to permit the work to proceed with as
little interruption as possible. Tests shall be made before any of the work is covered or
concealed.
E.
Materials other than those specified for jointing will not be permitted in the piping systems for
the purpose of stopping leaks.
F
The Contractor shall obtain from the pipe manufacturer(s) and furnish to the Architect/Engineer
a certificate(s) of inspection to the effect that the pipe supplied for this contract has been
inspected at the plant and that the pipe meets the requirements of these specifications.
G.
On completion of the sewerage system, or such other times as the Architect/Engineer may
direct, the sewer shall be cleaned, tested and inspected. Each manhole and other appurtenance
to the system shall be of the specified size and form, be watertight, neatly and substantially
constructed, with the top set permanently to exact position and grade. All repairs shown
necessary by the inspection shall be made; broken or cracked pipe replaced; all deposits
removed and the sewer left true to line and grade, entirely clean, and ready for use.
3.4
LIMITS OF INFILTRATION, EXFILTRATION AND TESTING
A.
The allowable limits of infiltration or exfiltration or leakage for the entire system or any portion
thereof, including house service lines, shall not exceed a rate of 0.1 gallon per foot of pipe per
24 hours for all sizes of pipe throughout the system. The allowable limits of infiltration or
exfiltration of manholes shall not exceed a rate of four gallons per manhole per 24 hours.
B.
Any part or all of the system may be tested for infiltration or exfiltration, as directed by the
Architect/Engineer. Prior to testing for infiltration, the system shall be pumped out so that
normal infiltration conditions exist at the time of testing. The amounts of infiltration or
exfiltration shall be determined by pumping into or out of calibrated drums, or by other
approved methods.
C.
The exfiltration test will be conducted by fillling the portion of the system being tested with
water to a level which will provide: a minimum head on a service lateral connected to the test
portion of 2-feet; or in the event there are no service laterals in the test portion, a minimum
difference in elevation of 5-feet between the crown of the highest portion of the sewer and the
test level.
D.
The Contractor shall provide all labor, equipment and materials and shall conduct all testing
required, under the direction of the Architect/Engineer. No separate or additional payment will
be made for this work.
END OF SECTION
SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES
333000 - 3
SECTION 334000 - STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
SCOPE OF WORK
The work covered and described in this Section includes the furnishing and construction of
inlets, culverts, drainage wells and other drainage structures as shown on the Drawings and
specified herein.
SUBMITTALS
In general, the following data and shop drawings shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer
for approval prior to construction:
1.
Pipe Certifications
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPE MATERIAL
All pipe in this section shall be of the same material. Pipe shall be one of the following, at the
Contractor's discretion.
A.
CORRUGATED POLYETHYLENE PIPE
Corrugated polyethylene pipe and french drain perforated pipe shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM F667 and AASHTO M252. Corrugated pipe field joints shall be
coupled with bands produced specifically for coupling polyethylene pipe and by the same
manufacturer as the pipe.
2.2
A.
2.3
A.
2.4
A.
BRICK
Brick for drainage structures shall be dense, hard burned, shale or clay brick conforming to
ASTM C 32, Grade MM or C 62, Grade MW, except that brick absorption shall be between
five and twenty-five grams of water absorbed in one minute by dried brick, set flat face down,
in 1/8-inch of water.
CEMENT MORTAR
Cement mortar shall be one part cement and two parts clean sharp sand to which may be added
lime in the amount of not over ten percent volume of cement. It shall be mixed dry and then
wetted to proper consistency for use.
CONCRETE
Concrete shall conform to the specified requirements in the Drawings and unless other
specified, all concrete shall be Class I concrete, minimum strength 3,000 psi.
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
334000 - 1
2.5
PRECAST CONCRETE UNITS
A.
2.6
Precast concrete structures shall conform to the drawings. Concrete for use in precast units
shall be minimum strength 4,000 psi.
CASTINGS
A.
Castings for inlets and other items shall conform to the ASTM Designation A48, Class 25.
Castings shall be true to pattern in form and dimensions and free of pouring faults and other
defects in positions which would impair their strength or otherwise make them unfit for the
service intended. No plugging or filling will be allowed. Casting patterns shall conform to
those shown or indicated on the drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPE TRENCHES
A.
3.2
Pipe trenches shall conform to the provisions of Section 02221 of these Specifications.
LAYING STORM DRAINAGE
A.
Storm drainage pipe installation shall conform to the requirements of Section 430 of the Florida
Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, for
the type of pipe material selected.
B.
Fill placed around the pipe shall be deposited on both sides simultaneously to approximately
the same elevation and uniformly compacted. Whenever the pipe laying is discontinued, as at
night, the unfinished end is to be securely protected from displacement due to caving of the
banks or from other injury and a suitable stopper is to be inserted therein.
3.3
DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
A.
3.4
Concrete inlets or other structures shall be constructed in conformity with the Drawings. Forms
shall be designed and constructed so that they may be removed without damage to the concrete
and shall be left in place for at least 24 hours after concrete is poured. Concrete shall be
thoroughly tamped and shall be cured for at least 5 days after removal of forms. Honeycombs
shall be thoroughly cleaned, saturated with water and pointed up with mortar.
BACKFILLING FOR PIPE CULVERTS AND DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
A.
After the pipe has been installed, trenches shall be backfilled in accordance with Section 02221
of these Specifications.
B.
Backfill for drainage structures shall be placed and compacted in the same manner as specified
above for pipe, except the concrete shall be permitted to cure for not less than five days before
the backfill is placed.
END OF SECTION
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
334000 - 2